2013 Accord Sedan

2013 Accord Sedan
Contents
2013 Accord Sedan
Online Reference Owner's Manual
2 Safe Driving P. 27
This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
2 Instrument Panel P. 67
For Safe Driving P. 28
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.
Indicators P. 68
Seat Belts P. 32
Airbags P. 39
Gauges and Displays P. 89
2 Controls P. 105
Setting the Clock P. 106
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 108
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 130
Adjusting the Seats P. 148
Climate Control System * P. 169
2 Features P. 173
Audio System P. 174
Customized Features P. 299
Audio System Basic Operation P. 180
P. 203
P. 236
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 337
2 Driving P. 417
Before Driving P. 418
Refueling P. 480
Towing a Trailer P. 423
Fuel Economy P. 482
2 Maintenance P. 485
Before Performing Maintenance P. 486
Maintenance MinderTM P. 489
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 523
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 537
Navigation Key
QRG
Quick Reference Guide
2 Handling the Unexpected P. 543
TOC
Chapter Table of Contents
Tools P. 544
Overheating P. 558
Index
Index
2 Information P. 569
Home Book Table of Contents
00X31-T2A-6000
© 2012 American Honda Motor Co., Inc. - All Rights Reserved
Specifications P. 570
Emissions Testing P. 577
AOM01842
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 545
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 560
Identification Numbers P. 574
Warranty Coverages P. 579
* Not available on all models
Contents
2013 Accord Sedan
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 52
Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 120
Security System P. 124
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 131
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 156
Audio Error Messages P. 289
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 289
P. 376
When Driving P. 427
Accessories and Modifications P. 483
Maintenance Under the Hood P. 497
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 525
Cleaning P. 538
Replacing Light Bulbs P. 513
Battery P. 534
Engine Does Not Start P. 551
Fuses P. 564
Jump Starting P. 554
Emergency Towing P. 567
Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 575
Authorized Manuals P. 581
Reporting Safety Defects P. 576
Customer Service Information P. 582
* Not available on all models
Opening and Closing the Windows P. 127
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 146
Heating and Cooling * P. 166
Safe Driving
P. 27
Instrument Panel
P. 67
Controls
P. 105
Features
P. 173
Driving
P. 417
Maintenance
P. 485
Handling the Unexpected
P. 543
Information
P. 569
Index
P. 586
General Information on the Audio System P. 295
Compass * P. 414
Braking P. 473
P. 2
Safety Labels P. 65
Parking Your Vehicle P. 477
Remote Transmitter Care P. 535
Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 557
Navigation Key
QRG
Quick Reference Guide
Index
TOC
Chapter Table of Contents
Home Book Table of Contents
Index
Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
❙ ECON Button (P 446)
❙ System Indicators (P 68)
❙ Gauges (P 89)
❙ Information Display * (P 90)
❙ Multi-Information Display * (P 93)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P 132)
❙ Audio/Information Screen
(P 181) (P 207) (P 239)
❙ Audio System (P 180) (P 203) (P 236)
❙ Audio with Touch Screen * (P 204) (P 237)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Heating and Cooling System * (P 166)
❙ Climate Control System * (P 169)
❙ Rear Window Defogger (P 142)
❙ Heated Mirror Button * (P 142)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual
❙ Front Seat Heater Switches * (P 164)
❙ Ignition Switch*1 (P 131)
Index
Home
2
❙ TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Button * (P 469)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 465)
❙ Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Button * (P 462)
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P 136)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 138)
❙ LaneWatchTM*(P 467)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift down) * (P 439)
❙
(Display) Button (P 181) (P 207) (P 239)
❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P 90)
❙ Brightness Control (P 141)
❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) * (P 439)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P 140)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons * (P 447)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons *
(P 450)
❙
(Information) Buttons * (P 93)
❙ SEL/RESET Button * (P 93)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 145)
❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P 245), () See Navigation System Manual
❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons (P 339) (P 376)
❙ SOURCE Button (P 179)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons (P 179)
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
3
QRG
Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
❙ Power Window Switches (P 127)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P 118)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P 147)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P 146)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P 565)
❙ Driver's Front Airbag (P 42)
❙ Passenger's Front Airbag
(P 42)
❙ Parking Brake (P 473)
❙ Trunk Main Switch * (P 122)
❙ Glove Box (P 158)
❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P 161)
❙ USB Port (P 175)
❙ Auxiliary Input Jack (P 176)
❙ Shift Lever
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
(P 435) (P 437)
Index
Home
4
❙ Hood Release Handle (P 499)
❙ Trunk Release (P 120)
❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P 481)
Automatic Transmission
(P 441)
Manual Transmission
(P 443)
* Not available on all models
QRG
❙ Seat Belts (P 32)
❙ Map Lights (P 157)
❙ Moonroof Switch *
(P 130)
❙ Sunglasses Holder
(P 163)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P 48)
❙ Ceiling Light (P 156)
❙ Grab Handle
❙ Coat Hook (P 162)
❙ Side Airbags (P 46)
❙ Front Seat (P 148)
❙ Accessory Power
Socket (P 161)
❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 59)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 61)
❙ Rear Seat (P 154)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 57)
* Not available on all models
Index
Home
5
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Index
Home
6
Visual Index
❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P 497)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P 140) (P 523)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P 147)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P 111)
❙ Headlights (P 136) (P 513)
❙ Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 136) (P 518)
❙ Parking Lights (P 136) (P 519)
❙ Fog Lights * (P 138) (P 515)
❙ Tires (P 525) (P 545)
❙ How to Refuel (P 481)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P 522)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P 120)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P 123)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P 478)
❙ Rear Camera (P 479)
❙ Trunk Release Button * (P 121)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P 521)
❙ Taillights (P 521)
❙ Brake/Taillights (P 520)
❙ Rear Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights (P 520)
* Not available on all models
Eco Assist System
QRG
Ambient Meter
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Ambient Meter
(P 446)
● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
Light green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.
Models with multi-information display
ECON Button (P 446)
Helps maximize fuel economy.
ECON Mode Indicator (P 80)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
This message is displayed for a few seconds
when the ECON button is pressed.
Index
Home
7
QRG
Safe Driving
(P 27)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Airbags (P 39)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 52)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 64)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.
Seat Belts (P 32)
Before Driving Checklist (P 31)
Index
Home
8
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.
Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.
Instrument Panel
(P 67)
System Indicators
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Speedometer
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Smart Entry System
Indicator *
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator
Temperature Gauge
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®) System
Indicator
VSA® OFF Indicator
System Indicators
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Fuel Gauge
Tachometer
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *
Models with
information
display
Models with
information
display
Parking Brake
and Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)
Canada
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Gauges (P 89)/Information Display * (P 90)/
Multi-Information Display * (P 93)/System Indicators (P 68)
Low Fuel Indicator
U.S.
Starter System
Indicator *
Canada
Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator
Washer Level
Indicator *
System Message
Indicator *
Maintenance Minder
Indicator *
* Not available on all models
M (7-speed manual
shift mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator *
System Indicators
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
ECON mode
Indicator
Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) Indicator*
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) Indicator*
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Lights Reminders
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
Indicator *
Fog Light Indicator *
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *
Light Control
Indicator *
CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *
Index
Home
9
QRG
Controls
(P 105)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Clock (P 106)
Models without navigation system
ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P 132)
Lights (P 136)
Light Control Switches
High Beam
Low Beam
Flashing
a
Enter the Clock Adjustment screen.
2 Setting the Clock (P 106)
b
Rotate
to change hour, then
press
.
c
Wipers and Washers (P 140)
Turn Signals (P 136)
Turn Signal Control Lever
Rotate
press
.
to change minute, then
Right
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
Adjustment Ring
: Long Delay
: Short Delay
Models with navigation system
The navigation system receives signals from
GPS satellites, updating the clock
automatically.
Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
Left
Index
Home
10
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe
* Not available on all models
Steering Wheel (P 145)
Trunk (P 120)
Trunk Release
● To unlock and open the trunk:
Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside
(P 116)
● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.
• Pull the trunk release.
• Press the trunk release button on the remote
transmitter or the smart entry remote.
• Press the trunk release button * on the
trunk lid.
Power Windows (P 127)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger's window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger's window switch is disabled.
Power Window Lock Button
Window
Switch
Indicator
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord
● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.
Power Door Mirrors
(P 147)
● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
Selector Switch
● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door
from the inner handle unlocks all the
other doors.
Index
Adjustment Switch
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
11
Heating and Cooling System * (P 166)
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
●
●
●
●
●
●
Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed and airflow.
Press the Mode buttons (
/
/
/
) to select the vents air flows from.
Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature.
Use the
button for maximum cool setting.
Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off.
Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Button
Button
Button
Button
Fan Control
Dial
(Windshield
Defroster) Button
Temperature
Control Dial
Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Rear Window Defogger/
Heated Mirror) Button
Air flows from dashboard
vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Index
Home
12
* Not available on all models
Climate Control System * (P 169)
● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
QRG
AUTO Button
Driver’s Side
Temperature Control
Buttons
(On/Off) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button
MODE Control Button
/
(Fan Control) Buttons
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control Buttons
(Rear Window Defogger/Heated Mirror *)
Button
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Models with navigation system
The climate control system is voice operable. (P 245)
(Recirculation) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
Air flows from dashboard vents and
back of the center console *.
Air flows from floor and dashboard
vents, and back of the center console *.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and windshield
defroster vents.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
13
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Index
Features
(P 173)
Audio System (P 180) (P 203) (P 236)
Models with one display (P 180)
Audio Remote Controls
(P 179)
(+ / (- /
/
Button
Audio/Information
Screen
SOURCE
Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press and release to adjust the volume up/
down.
● SOURCE Button
Press and release to change the audio
mode: FM/AM/CD/XM® */HDD */USB/iPod®/
Bluetooth/Pandora® */AhaTM*/AUX.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press and release to change the
preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
CD/HDD */USB device:
Press and release to skip to the
beginning of the next song or
return to the beginning of the
current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
CD Button
FM/AM Button
Button
CD Slot
AUX Button
PHONE Button
(CD Eject)
Button
DISP Button
SETTINGS Button
(Skip/Seek)
Button
(Skip/Seek)
Button
VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
MENU Button
Selector Knob
BACK Button
Preset Buttons
(1-6)
Home
14
* Not available on all models
Models with two displays (P 203)
QRG
Audio with Touch Screen
Button
Phone*1
CD Slot
(CD Eject) Button
Source
*1
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Audio/Information Screen
Clock/Screen*1
DISP Button
(Tune Down) Icon*1
VOL/ (Volume/Power)
Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
(Tune Up) Icon*1
Selector Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
BACK Button
Presets*1
More*1
Index
*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
* Not available on all models
Home
15
Models with navigation system (P 236)
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
Source*1
CD Slot
(Power) Button
(Tune Down) Icon*1
(CD Eject) Button
(Tune Up) Icon*1
VOL (Volume) Knob
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
(Skip/Seek) Icon*1
Presets*1
More*1
PHONE Button
INFO Button
NAV Button
AUDIO Button
BACK Button
Button
MENU Button
SETTINGS Button
Index
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Home
16
*1: Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source selected.
Driving
(P 417)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .
QRG
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode When the shift lever is in (S
● Pulling a paddle shifter
(P 439)
● Allows you to manually shift
changes the mode from
the transmission up or down
automatic transmission (CVT) to
without removing your hands
7-speed manual shift mode.
from the steering wheel.
● The M indicator and the
selected speed number are
M Indicator
displayed in the shift indicator.
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
Models without
paddle shifter
Models with
paddle shifter
Shift Lever
When the shift lever is in (D
Shift Indicator
Shift Down (- Shift Up (+
Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter
Release
Button
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
● Normal driving.
● On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed mode can
be used temporarily.
● Pulling a paddle shifter
temporarily changes the mode
from automatic transmission
(CVT) to 7-speed manual shift
mode. The selected speed
number is displayed in the shift
indicator.
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Manual Transmission (P 443)
(P 435)
Automatic Transmission (CVT) (P 437)
Drive (S)
●
●
●
●
Better acceleration.
Increased engine braking.
Going up or down hills.
On models with paddle
shifter, 7-speed manual
shift mode can be used.
Low *
● Further Increased engine
braking.
● Going up or down hills.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
17
Automatic Transmission (P 441)
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Index
Home
18
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.
Shift Lever
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Release
Button
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Drive (S)
● Automatically changing
gears between 1st and 5th
(5th gear is used only in at
high speed).
● Used when towing a trailer
in hilly terrain.
● Used to increase engine
braking.
Depress the brake pedal
and press the release button
to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.
VSA® OFF Button (P 466)
Cruise Control (P 447)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 469)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and
overall dimensions due to decrease in tire
pressures.
● TPMS is turned on automatically every
time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
Refueling (P 480)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline with a pump octane number 87 or
higher required
Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 L)
a
Push the fuel fill door
release handle.
b
Turn the fuel fill cap
slowly to remove the
cap.
c
Place the cap in the
holder on the fuel fill
door.
d
After refueling, screw
the cap back on until it
clicks at least once.
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system
helps stabilize the vehicle during
cornering, and helps maintain traction
while accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To turn VSA® on or off, press and hold
the button until you hear a beep.
Index
Home
19
QRG
Maintenance
(P 485)
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Under the Hood (P 497)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer
fluid. Add when necessary.
● Check brake fluid and clutch * fluid.
● Check the battery regularly.
a
Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the
dashboard.
b
Locate the hood latch lever, pull the lever up, and lift up
the hood.
Wiper Blades (P 523)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.
Tires (P 525)
Lights (P 513)
● Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.
● Inspect all lights regularly.
Index
c
Home
20
When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly
locked in place.
* Not available on all models
Handling the Unexpected
(P 543)
Engine Won't Start
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.
(P 551)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.
Overheating (P 558)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.
Indicators Come On
Blown Fuse (P 564)
Emergency Towing
(P 560)
● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.
(P 567)
● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Flat Tire (P 545)
● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.
Index
Home
21
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Index
What to Do If
The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q *1.
Why?
●
The steering wheel may be locked.
●
Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key *.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button * at
the same time.
The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 *1
and I cannot remove the
key. Why?
The shift lever should be moved to (P .
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?
This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.
The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?
Check if the childproof lock is in
the lock position. If so, open the
rear door with the outside door
handle.
To cancel this function, push the
lever to the unlock position.
Home
22
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.
Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?
The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch *.
Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?
●
The power mode * is in ACCESSORY.
●
The exterior lights are left on.
The beeper sounds when:
● Driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.
●
Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?
The parking brake lever is not fully released.
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
23
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
Index
Home
24
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recorders
The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgement.
3DANGER
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3WARNING
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
3CAUTION
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
QRG
Quick Reference Guide - 2013 Accord Sedan
A Few Words About Safety
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.
Index
Home
25
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
26
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.
For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 28
Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 30
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 32
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 35
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 38
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 39
Types of Airbags ................................ 42
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 42
Side Airbags....................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 48
Airbag System Indicators.................... 49
Airbag Care ....................................... 51
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 52
Safety of Infants and Small Children .......54
Safety of Larger Children ................... 62
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 64
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 65
Index
Home
27
For Safe Driving
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.
■ Restrain all children
Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.
■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
■ Don't drink and drive
Index
Home
28
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.
1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.
uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.
TOC
Safe Driving
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.
■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Index
Home
29
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Your Vehicle's Safety Features
1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
TOC
9
8
Safe Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.
9
6
10
7
8
Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
10
11
7
6
7
8
9
10
11
Index
Home
30
Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners
The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.
uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Safety CheckList
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 116
If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door
and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all
doors and the trunk tightly until the indicator goes
off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator P. 74
Models with information display
TOC
Safe Driving
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.
1Safety CheckList
• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 148
• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 151
Models with multi-information display
• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height
and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 52
Index
Home
31
Seat Belts
QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers
■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with
child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 59
Index
Home
32
2013 Accord Sedan
About Your Seat Belts
1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Proper use of seat belts
1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
TOC
Safe Driving
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduces the effectiveness of
the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
■ Seat Belt Reminder
*
1Seat Belt Reminder
Your vehicle monitors front seat belt use. If
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1
before the driver's seat belt is fastened, a
beeper will sound and the indicator will blink.
If the driver does not fasten the belt before
the beeper stops, the indicator will remain on.
The beeper will also periodically sound and
the indicator will blink while driving until the
driver's and front passenger’s seat belts are
fastened.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within 6 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat,
or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator
will not come on.
This is because the weight sensors in the seat cannot
detect their presence.
Index
Home
Continued
33
uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
TOC
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
Safe Driving
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.
1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.
Index
Home
34
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
2013 Accord Sedan
Fastening a Seat Belt
QRG
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 148
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.
No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.
TOC
Safe Driving
Pull out slowly.
1Fastening a Seat Belt
2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.
Latch
Plate
Buckle
Index
Home
Continued
35
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
Lap belt
as low as
possible
3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.
Push
Index
Home
36
1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.
uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.
TOC
Safe Driving
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
1Advice for Pregnant Women
Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.
Index
Home
37
uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection
QRG
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
TOC
• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
Safe Driving
• Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.
Index
Home
38
2013 Accord Sedan
Seat Belt Inspection
1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.
Airbags
2013 Accord Sedan
Airbag System Components
QRG
TOC
10
9
8
7
Safe Driving
8
12
8
6
8
11
8
Index
8
Home
Continued
39
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Safe Driving
The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:
d An electronic control unit that continually
monitors and records information about
the sensors, the airbag activators, the
seat belt tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
front seat belt tensioners. The
driver's and front passenger's seat belts
incorporate sensors that detect whether
or not they are fastened.
side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
c Two
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
driver's seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.
g Weight
sensors in the front passenger's
seat. The front passenger's airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is 65
lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant
or small child).
Index
Home
40
sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front or side
collision.
i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts
you that the front passenger's front
airbag has been turned off.
e Automatic
fA
b Two
h Impact
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
j An indicator on the instrument panel that
alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
k Safing
lA
Sensor
rollover sensor that detects whether
the vehicle is about to roll over.
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Important facts about your airbags
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.
TOC
Safe Driving
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
1Important facts about your airbags
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
Index
Home
41
uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags
QRG
TOC
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats.
Safe Driving
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.
Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.
■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.
Index
Home
42
2013 Accord Sedan
Types of Airbags
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. Although the powder is not
harmful, people with respiratory problems may
experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs,
get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
1Front Airbags (SRS)
Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold
Front Airbags (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Operation
TOC
Safe Driving
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.
■ How the Front Airbags Work
1How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.
The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.
Index
Home
Continued
43
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ When front airbags should not deploy
TOC
Safe Driving
Index
Home
44
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur
during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the
severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: Seat belts and, in vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side airbags
and side curtain airbags offer the best protection in a rollover. Because front airbags
could provide little if any protection, they are not designed to deploy during a
rollover.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.
uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Advanced Airbags
1Advanced Airbags
Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor
If the seat is too far forward, the airbag
inflates with less force, regardless of the
severity of the impact.
The passenger's advanced front airbag system
has weight sensors.
Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver's seating position.
For both advanced front airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not place any cover over the passenger side
dashboard.
TOC
Safe Driving
Your front airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag
related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced front airbag system
includes a seat position sensor.
Although we recommend against carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the sensors
detect the weight of a child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically
turn off the passenger's front airbag.
Index
Home
45
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
QRG
TOC
2013 Accord Sedan
Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.
Safe Driving
■ Housing Locations
The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
Housing
Location
■ Operation
When
inflated
Side
Airbag
Index
Home
46
When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.
1Side Airbags
Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
If the impact is on the passenger side, the airbag
deploys even if there is no passenger in the passenger
seat.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.
uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage
■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible
damage appears severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was towards
the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts
absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have
been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
TOC
Safe Driving
Because the airbag systems senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.
Index
Home
47
uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
2013 Accord Sedan
Side Curtain Airbags
TOC
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in outer
seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags
equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly
rollover crashes.
Safe Driving
QRG
■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.
■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.
Deployed Side Curtain Airbag
Home
48
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag will inflate even if
there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.
Side Curtain Airbag Storage
Index
1Side Curtain Airbags
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal
collision.
TOC
Safe Driving
In this case, the side curtain airbags will deploy slightly after the front airbags.
Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the multi-information display *.
■ SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
*
1SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator
■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.
If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
49
uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
TOC
U.S.
Canada
■ When the passenger airbag off
Safe Driving
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the front passenger’s weight
sensors detect 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the
weight of an infant or small child, on the seat.
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and
no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult
riding there, something may be interfering with the
weight sensors. Such as:
• An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back
pocket.
• A child seat or other object pressing against the
rear of the seat-back.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of
the front passenger's seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is forced back against
Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 52
Index
Home
50
an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger's seat.
Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on.
If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger's front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
goes off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
uuAirbagsuAirbag Care
2013 Accord Sedan
Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.
TOC
Safe Driving
■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.
QRG
1Airbag Care
■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the
passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate
a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American
Honda Automobile Customer Service at 800-999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles,
Honda Canada Customer Relations at 888-9-HONDA-9.
Index
Home
51
Child Safety
QRG
Protecting Child Passengers
TOC
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the
number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.
Safe Driving
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver's ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.
Index
Home
52
2013 Accord Sedan
1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Canada recommend
that all children age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/
territories have laws restricting where children may
ride.
uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.
TOC
Safe Driving
• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.
1Protecting Child Passengers
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 65
Index
Home
53
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
QRG
■ Protecting Infants
TOC
2013 Accord Sedan
Safety of Infants and Small Children
Safe Driving
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat maker's weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is
at least one year old.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.
1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.
When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 39
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.
Index
Home
54
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Protecting Smaller Children
1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.
TOC
Safe Driving
If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.
Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.
Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
up to age two, if the child’s height and weight are
appropriate for a rear-facing seat.
Index
Home
Continued
55
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Selecting a Child Seat
TOC
Safe Driving
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector, while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer's use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.
■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Index
Home
56
1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
TOC
Safe Driving
A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.
Marks
Lower Anchors
Rigid Type
2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.
Index
Flexible Type
Home
Continued
57
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Tether Strap
Hook
3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
Safe Driving
4. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
between the head restraint legs, and secure
the tether strap hook onto the anchor.
Anchor
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat maker.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Index
Home
58
1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
For your child's safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat
that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
TOC
Safe Driving
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker's instructions,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.
3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 2 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.
Index
Home
Continued
59
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
Safe Driving
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.
Index
Home
60
1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adding Security with a Tether
Tether Anchorage Points
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.
TOC
Safe Driving
Cover
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. A child seat that is
installed with a seat belt and comes with a
tether can use the tether for additional
security.
1Adding Security with a Tether
1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
Anchor
Outer Position
Tether Strap
Hook
2. Raise the head restraint to its highest
position, then route the tether strap
through the head restraint legs. Make sure
the strap is not twisted.
Anchor
Center Position
Tether Strap
Hook
3. Secure the tether strap hook onto the
anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
Index
Anchor
Home
61
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
QRG
■ Protecting Larger Children
TOC
Safe Driving
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.
■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.
Index
Home
62
2013 Accord Sedan
Safety of Larger Children
1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.
uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Booster Seats
1Booster Seats
■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.
TOC
Safe Driving
If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child's safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer's recommendations.
Some U.S. states and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.
■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.
Index
Home
63
Exhaust Gas Hazard
QRG
Carbon Monoxide Gas
TOC
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving
■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control
system * as shown below.
2013 Accord Sedan
1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner
if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.
Index
Home
64
* Not available on all models
Safety Labels
2013 Accord Sedan
Label Locations
QRG
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
Sun Visor
U.S. models
Dashboard
U.S. models only
Safe Driving
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.
TOC
Canadian models
Doorjambs
U.S. models
Canadian models
Radiator Cap
Index
Home
65
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
66
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 68
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages * .................... 82
Multi-Information Display Warning and
Information Messages * .................... 84
Gauges and Displays
Gauges.............................................. 89
Information Display * .......................... 90
Multi-Information Display *................. 93
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
67
Indicators
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
TOC
U.S.
Instrument Panel
Canada
●
Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)
●
●
●
U.S.
Canada
●
Brake System
Indicator
(Amber)
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake override system.
●
Message *
Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on P. 562
●
Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On P. 562
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Index
Home
68
1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
●
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
●
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off either when the engine
starts or after several seconds if the
engine is not started. If “readiness
codes” have not been set, it blinks
five times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine's cylinders is detected.
●
Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.
●
Comes on while driving - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take the vehicle to a dealer.
Message *
Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 560
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 577
●
2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 561
●
Charging System
Indicator
●
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn off the
heating and cooling system */climate
control system * and rear defogger in
order to reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 560
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
69
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
Explanation
Message *
Models with
information
display
TOC
Instrument Panel
Models with
multiinformation
display
Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *
M (7-speed
manual shift
mode) Indicator/
Shift Indicator *
●
Indicates in which position your
shift lever is.
●
Comes on when 7-speed manual
shift mode is applied.
2 Shifting P. 435
P. 437
P. 441
—
2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 439
—
Index
Home
70
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
●
Models with
information
display
Blinks if the transmission system has
a problem.
Explanation
●
Message *
Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have the
vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
TOC
Instrument Panel
Models with
multiinformation
display
On/Blinking
Transmission
Indicator *
●
Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator
●
●
Comes on and the beeper sounds if
you are not wearing a seat belt when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1.
If the front passenger is not wearing
a seat belt, the indicator comes on
about six seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not fastened
a seat belt. The beeper sounds and
the indicator blinks at regular
intervals.
●
●
The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat
belt - A detection error may have
occurred in the sensor. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 33
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
71
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
TOC
Low Fuel
Indicator
●
Instrument Panel
●
ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
Indicator
●
●
Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator
●
Explanation
Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 2.6 U.S.
gal./9.7 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with the
fuel gauge.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner
●
●
Message *
Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
Blinks - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
P. 475
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
72
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
OFF Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate
VSA®.
●
Message *
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
2 VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System P. 465
TOC
Instrument Panel
VSA® (Vehicle
Stability Assist)
System Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the VSA® system or hill start assist
system.
Explanation
2 VSA® On and Off P. 466
—
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
73
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
Models with
information
display
TOC
●
Instrument Panel
●
Models with
multiinformation
display
Door and Trunk
Open Indicator
●
EPS (Electric
Power Steering)
System Indicator
●
Explanation
Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1,
then goes off.
Comes on if any door or the trunk is
not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the indicator
comes on if any door or the trunk is
opened while driving.
●
Goes off when all doors and the trunk
are closed.
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes
off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System.
●
Stays on constantly or does not
come on at all - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Message *
2 If the EPS System Indicator Comes
On P. 562
Index
Home
74
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
●
Comes on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
May come on briefly if the ignition switch
is turned to ON (w *1 and the vehicle is not
moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the
calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly low.
- The system has not been calibrated.
●
Blinks for about one minute, and then
stays on if there is a problem with the
TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is
temporarily installed.
●
●
Message *
Comes on while driving - Stop in a
safe place, check tire pressures, and
inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated
to the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.
TOC
Instrument Panel
Low Tire
Pressure/
TPMS
Indicator
Explanation
2 TPMS Calibration P. 469
Blinks and remains on - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the
vehicle is fitted with a compact spare,
get your regular tire repaired or
replaced and put back on your vehicle
as soon as you can.
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
75
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
TOC
Instrument Panel
System
Message
Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when you set
the power mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep when a
problem is detected. A system message on
the multi-information display appears at
the same time.
Explanation
●
●
●
Turn Signal
and Hazard
Warning
Indicators
High Beam
Indicator
●
●
●
●
Lights On
Indicator
The turn signal indicators blink when you
operate the turn signal lever.
If you press the hazard warning button,
both indicators and all turn signals blink at
the same time.
●
Index
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown.
Change the bulb immediately.
—
—
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 518,
P. 520
Comes on when the high beam headlights
are on.
Comes on whenever the light switch is on,
or in AUTO when the exterior lights are
on.
While the indicator is on, press the
(information) button to see the
message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in
this chapter when a system message
appears on the multi-information
display. Take the appropriate action for
the message.
The multi-information display does not return
to the normal screen unless the warning is
canceled, or the
button is pressed.
Message *
—
●
If you remove the key from the ignition
switch*1 while the exterior lights are on,
a chime sounds when the driver's door
is opened.
—
—
Home
76
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
Fog Light
Indicator *
●
●
Explanation
Message *
Comes on when the fog lights are
on.
—
—
Comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, then
goes off.
Comes on if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.
●
●
●
●
Security System
Alarm Indicator
Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
Blinks - You cannot start the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1,
pull the key out, and then insert the key
and turn it to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems can occur.
2 Security System Alarm P. 124
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Immobilizer
System Indicator
On/Blinking
—
—
Indicator
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
77
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Comes on for a few seconds
when you change the power
mode to ON, then goes off.
Comes on when you have
customized FCW to turn off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the FCW system.
Models with information display
●
Forward
Collision
Warning
(FCW)
Indicator *
Comes on when the FCW
system shuts itself off.
Message*1
●
Stays on constantly without FCW off - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
●
Blinks while driving - Take appropriate action to prevent
a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.).
Blinks when the system detects
a likely collision with a vehicle
in front of you. The beeper
sounds.
All models
●
Explanation
—
—
Models with information display
●
Stays on - The temperature inside the FCW system is too high.
The system activates when the temperature inside the system
cools down.
—
2 Automatic shutoff P. 460
●
●
Stays on - The radar sensor or the area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and
wipe it off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if:
Models with multi-information display
The indicator and message stay on after you cleaned the
radar sensor cover.
Models with information display
The indicator and message come back on after you cleaned
the area around the camera.
Index
2 Automatic shutoff P. 460
2 Automatic shutoff P. 460
—
—
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
78
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
Models with information display
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
Indicator *
●
Blinks when your vehicle is too close
to the lane lines. The beeper sounds.
●
Comes on when the LDW system
shuts itself off.
●
Message*1
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
TOC
●
●
Blinks while driving - Take
appropriate action to keep your vehicle
within the lane lines.
—
—
Stays on - The temperature inside the
LDW camera is too high.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.
Instrument Panel
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
the LDW system.
Explanation
2 LDW Camera P. 463
●
●
Stays on - The area around the camera
is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off
with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back
on after you cleaned the area around
the camera.
2 LDW Camera P. 463
*1:On the left: Models with information display
Index
On the right: Models with multi-information display
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
79
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
TOC
Name
Instrument Panel
ACC (Adaptive
Cruise Control)
Indicator
(Amber) *
On/Blinking
●
●
●
ECON Mode
Indicator
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem with
ACC.
2 Cruise Control* P. 447
—
2 Cruise Control* P. 447
—
Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.
CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator *
●
Comes on if you have set a speed for
cruise control.
Maintenance
Minder Indicator *
●
Comes on while driving - Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 ECON Button P. 446
●
●
●
Message *
Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes
off when the engine starts.
Comes on when you press the
ECON button.
CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *
Washer Level
Indicator *
Explanation
Comes on when the washer fluid
gets low.
Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon.
●
Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid
P. 512
—
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 489
—
Index
Home
80
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Indicator
Name
On/Blinking
●
●
●
U.S.
Canada
Starter System
Indicator *
●
●
Light Control
Indicator *
Comes on for a few seconds when
you change the power mode to ON.
Comes on as soon as a problem is
detected in the smart entry system
or push button starting system.
●
Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the power mode to ON,
then goes off.
Comes on if the starting system has
a problem.
●
Comes on if there is a problem with
the automatic lighting control
system or low beam headlights *.
●
Message *
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
TOC
As a temporary measure, press and hold
the ENGINE START/STOP button for 15
seconds while pressing the brake pedal and
manually start the engine. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on while driving - Turn the lights
on manually and have the vehicle checked
by a dealer.
Instrument Panel
Smart Entry
System
Indicator *
Explanation
—
—
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Home
* Not available on all models
81
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message
Condition
●
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 561
●
Stays on constantly - Have the vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Index
Home
82
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with smart entry system
Message
Condition
●
●
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .
—
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button at the same time.
●
Appears when you close the door with the power mode
in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.
●
Appears when the smart entry remote’s battery
becomes weak.
●
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP button
to turn the engine off without the shift lever in (P .
Explanation
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 535
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
83
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
QRG
Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the
with the system message indicator on.
Message
TOC
Condition
●
2013 Accord Sedan
(information) button to see the message again
Explanation
Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not
installed.
Instrument Panel
2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 561
●
●
Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
uConsequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.
2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 494
Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.
2 Overheating P. 558
Index
●
Appears if there is a problem with the automatic
lighting control system.
●
Comes on while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears if there is a problem with the low beam
headlights.
●
Comes on while driving - Turn the lights on manually
and have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Home
84
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Message
Condition
●
Explanation
Appears while you are customizing the settings and
the shift lever is moved out of (P .
2 Customized Features P. 97
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s door.
2 Starting the Engine P. 429
●
Appears three seconds after the To Start Engine
message appears.
2 Starting the Engine P. 429
●
Appears when the steering wheel is locked.
●
Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
●
Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P .
●
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice after
moving the shift lever to (P .
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
85
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Message
Condition
●
Explanation
Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—
TOC
Instrument Panel
●
Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.
●
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
●
Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.
●
Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote
back inside the vehicle and close the door.
Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.
●
●
●
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to start the engine or the key is not with you to
start the engine. A beeper sounds six times.
2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 134
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 535
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 552
Index
Home
86
* Not available on all models
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Message
Condition
●
●
Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.
Appears when the battery is not charging.
Explanation
●
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears along with the battery charging system
indicator - Turn off the climate control system and rear
defogger to reduce electricity consumption.
2 Checking the Battery P. 534
●
Appears when the starting system has a problem.
●
As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 15 seconds while pressing the
brake pedal and manually start the engine. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer.
●
Appears for about three seconds when ACC has
been automatically canceled.
●
You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+
button.
Instrument Panel
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 560
TOC
2 ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) * P. 450
●
Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with
a vehicle in front of you.
●
Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the
brakes, change lanes, etc.).
2 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * P. 458
●
Appears when your vehicle is too close to the traffic
lane lines. The beeper sounds.
●
Take appropriate action to keep your vehicle within the
lane lines.
2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * P. 462
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
87
uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Message
Condition
●
Explanation
Appears when you press the MAIN button.
2 ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) * P. 450
TOC
Instrument Panel
Index
Home
88
* Not available on all models
Gauges and Displays
2013 Accord Sedan
Gauges
QRG
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
■ Speedometer
TOC
Displays your driving speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada).
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.
■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
1Fuel Gauge
Instrument Panel
■ Tachometer
NOTICE
You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.
■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE
Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 558
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
89
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Information Display *
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.
■ Switching the Display
TOC
Press the
1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
(Select/Reset) knob to change the display.
Instrument Panel
Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Select/Reset
Knob
Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature
Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature
Engine Oil Life
Index
Some of the items on the information display also
appear on the audio/information screen. They also
change along with the information display changes
while the fuel consumption is shown.
Home
90
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
■ Trip Meter
1Trip Meter
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.
knob. The trip meter is
■ Average Fuel Economy
TOC
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.
1Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 299
■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 489
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
91
uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Outside Temperature *
■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
TOC
1Outside Temperature *
Instrument Panel
2. Press and hold the
(Select/Reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the
outside temperature is shown on the information display.
uThe information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
1Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C.
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
uThe adjustment is complete.
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
Index
Home
92
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
Multi-Information Display *
QRG
The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, outside temperature
indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.
■ Switching the Display
TOC
(information) button or the SEL/RESET button to change the
Average Fuel Economy/
Instant Fuel Economy
Range
Elapsed Time
Average Speed
Instrument Panel
Press the
display.
SEL/RESET
Button
Index
Button
Black Screen
Vehicle Settings
Engine Oil Life
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
93
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Odometer
Trip A
Trip B
TOC
Instrument Panel
SEL/RESET
Button
Index
Home
94
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has
accumulated.
■ Trip Meter
1Trip Meter
■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip
meter is reset to 0.0.
■ Average Fuel Economy
TOC
Instrument Panel
Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last
reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the SEL/RESET button.
1Average Fuel Economy
Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100
km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the
average fuel economy is also reset.
You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
■ Range
Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past.
■ Elapsed Time
1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Shows the time elapsed since the last time Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
95
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Average Speed
Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since the last time Trip A
or Trip B was reset.
TOC
1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
■ Instant Fuel Economy
Instrument Panel
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).
■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 489
■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).
■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
Use the multi-information display's customized
features to correct the temperature.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Index
Home
96
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Customized Features
1Customized Features
To customize other features, press the
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 100
2 Example of customization settings P. 103
Use the multi-information display to customize certain features.
button while the power
Press the SEL/RESET button.
Multi-Information Display:
Goes to Vehicle Settings.
TOC
Customization is possible when you see the driver’s
ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) on the screen.
The driver’s ID indicates which remote transmitter
you have used to unlock the driver’s door. The
customized settings are recalled every time you
unlock the driver’s door with that remote.
Instrument Panel
■ How to customize
Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the
mode is in ON, and the vehicle is at a complete stop.
When you customize settings: Shift to (P
Button:
Changes the customize
menus and items.
SEL/RESET button:
Enters the selected item.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
97
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Customization flow
Press the
button.
Vehicle Settings
SEL/RESET
TOC
TPMS Calibration
Instrument Panel
3
4
Driver Assist System Setup
SEL/RESET
3
4
Meter Setup
SEL/RESET
3
4
SEL/RESET
3
4
Position Setup
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep
ACC Display Speed Unit
Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
SEL/RESET
Memory Position Link
SEL/RESET
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
3
4
Keyless Access Setup
Index
3
4
Home
98
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
3
4
Lighting Setup
SEL/RESET
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
TOC
Instrument Panel
3
4
Door Setup
3
4
3
4
SEL/RESET
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
3
4
Default All
3
4
SEL/RESET
Exit
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
99
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ List of customizable options
Setup Group
TOC
TPMS
Calibration
Instrument Panel
Driver Assist
System
Setup
Customizable Features
—
Description
Selectable Settings
Calibrates the TPMS.
Cancel/Calibrate
Forward Collision
Warning Distance
Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns FCW
on and off.
Long/Normal*1/Short/Off
ACC Pre-Running Car
Detect Beep
Causes the system to beep when a vehicle ahead of
you gets too close.
On*1/Off
ACC Display Speed Unit
Changes the ACC display speed unit.
mph*1/km/h
Language Selection
Changes the displayed language.
English*1/French/Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
Meter Setup
Index
Home
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
100
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup Group
Driving
Position
Setup
Lighting
Setup
Description
Selectable Settings
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver's seat position to a stored
setting.
On*1/Off
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only /All Doors
Keyless Access Light
Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab either
front door handle.
On*1/Off
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.
60sec/30sec*1/15sec
Headlight Auto Off
Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver's door.
60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.
Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min
TOC
*1
Instrument Panel
Keyless
Access
Setup
Customizable Features
*1: Default Setting
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
101
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup Group
Customizable Features
Description
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift
from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
All Doors When Driver’s
Door Opens*1/All Doors
When Shifted To Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.
Driver Door*1/ All Doors
Keyless Lock Answer
Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.
90sec/60sec/30sec*1
Auto Door Lock
TOC
Instrument Panel
Door Setup
Selectable Settings
Maintenance
Reset
—
Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service.
Cancel/Reset
Default All
—
Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.
Cancel/Set
*1: Default Setting
Index
Home
102
* Not available on all models
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to With Refuel are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
TOC
Instrument Panel
1. Press
button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
2. Press the
button until Meter
Setup appears on the display.
3. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
103
uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Instrument Panel
4. Press the
button until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select With Refuel, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.
5. Press the
button and select With
Refuel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The With Refuel Setup screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
6. Press the
button until Exit appears
on the display, then press the SEL/RESET
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.
Index
Home
104
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.
Setting the Clock .............................. 106
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 108
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength * ....................................110
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 116
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 118
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 119
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 120
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 124
Security System Alarm...................... 124
Opening and Closing the Windows..... 127
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * .. 130
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 131
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 132
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 135
Turn Signals ..................................... 136
Light Switches.................................. 136
Fog Lights * ...................................... 138
Daytime Running Lights ................... 139
Wipers and Washers ........................ 140
Brightness Control ........................... 141
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
Button ........................................... 142
Driving Position Memory System * .... 143
Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 145
Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 146
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 147
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 148
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 156
Heating and Cooling *
Using Vents, Heating and A/C.......... 166
Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 169
Synchronized Mode ......................... 171
Automatic Climate Control Sensors... 172
Index
Home
105
Setting the Clock
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Clock
Models without navigation system
1Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON w *1.
Models with navigation system
The clock is automatically updated through the
navigation system, so the time does not need to be
adjusted.
■ Adjusting the Time
■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
Models without navigation system
Models with one display
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
TOC
Controls
Models with two displays
Rotate
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
Press
All models
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
then Clock Adjustment.
3. Rotate
to change hour, then press
4. Rotate
to change minute, then press
Index
Home
106
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
.
.
to select.
to enter.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 299
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 299
uuSetting the ClockuClock
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with one display
1Using the SETTINGS button
■ Using the SETTINGS button
CLOCK (SETTINGS)
Button
1. Press and hold the CLOCK (SETTINGS)
button until the clock display blinks.
To set the time to the nearest hour: Press and hold
the CLOCK button until the clock display blinks, then
press the (6 (Reset) button.
(6 (Reset) Button
2. Press Preset (4 (Hour) or (5 (Minute) to
adjust the time.
Depending on the displayed time, the clock sets
forward or backward.
(4 (Hour) Button
3. Press the CLOCK button again to set the
time.
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
TOC
Controls
(5 (Minute) Button
Example:
Models with two displays
■ Using the audio with touch screen
1. Select
.
2. Select Clock.
3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting
3/4.
4. Select 12H or 24H.
5. Press Set to set the time.
Index
Home
107
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following key:
■ Master Keys
Master Key *
Smart Entry
Remote *
TOC
Use the keys to start and stop the engine, to
lock and unlock the doors and to open the
trunk. You can also use the remote
transmitter or smart entry system * to lock and
unlock the doors and to open the trunk.
Controls
There is a panic button in the remote
transmitter.
■ Smart entry remote
Release Knob
Built-in Key
The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
1Key Types and Functions
All of the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 124
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.
Index
Home
108
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Valet Key
1Valet Key *
*
Gray
Can be used to start and stop the engine, and
lock and unlock driver's door.
When you need to leave a key with a third party,
leave the valet key.
TOC
Controls
■ Key Number Tag
1Key Number Tag
Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.
Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
109
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
QRG
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or to start the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
TOC
Controls
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
2013 Accord Sedan
1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.
Index
Home
110
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 Accord Sedan
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
QRG
1Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Using the Remote Transmitter
■ Locking the doors
Lock Button
Press the lock button.
LED
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash, all the doors
lock, and the security system sets.
TOC
Controls
Unlock Button
Twice (within five seconds after the
first push):
uA beeper sounds and verifies the security
system is set.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
If the interior light switch is in the door activated
position, the interior lights come on when you press
the unlock button.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30
seconds.
Doors relocked with the remote: The lights go off
immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 156
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
Models without smart entry system
The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter or smart entry system only when the
power mode in VEHICLE OFF.
All models
Index
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.
Home
Continued
111
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
uSome exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door unlocks.
Twice:
uThe remaining doors unlock.
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
112
1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 535
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System
*
When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors within a radius
of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door
handle. You can open the trunk within about
32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk
release button.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
•
•
Press the door lock button on the front door.
uSome exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors lock; and the
security system sets.
•
remote can lock/unlock the doors if a person who
is carrying it is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
You cannot unlock the door by gripping the handle
after two seconds of unlocking it.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
TOC
Controls
•
■ Locking the doors and the trunk
Door Lock Button
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
If the distance at which it works varies, the battery is
probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 535
You can customize the door lock mode and keyless
lock acknowledgement setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
113
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Unlocking the doors and the trunk
Grab the driver’s door handle:
uThe driver’s door unlocks.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
uAll the doors unlock.
uSome exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
TOC
Controls
Trunk Release Button
Press the trunk release button:
uThe trunk unlocks and opens.
2 Using the Trunk Release Button * P. 121
1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *
• Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart
entry remote if it is above or below the outside
handle.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.
If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle, the doors will automatically
relock.
The light flash, beep and unlock settings can be
customized.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Index
Home
114
* Not available on all models
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock
1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver's door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Unlock
■ Locking the driver's door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.
1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
Controls
■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
TOC
When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand before
locking the door to prevent it from being locked in
the vehicle.
■ Locking the passenger's doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.
■ Lockout prevention system
The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch*1, or the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
115
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
QRG
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock
To Unlock
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
116
2013 Accord Sedan
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
Lock Tab
1Using the Lock Tab
Push the lock tab forward.
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, all the other doors lock at the same
time.
■ Unlocking a door
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver's door, only the driver's door will unlock.
■ Locking a door
Pull the lock tab rearward.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
1Unlocking Using the Inner Handle of Front Doors
Pull the front door inner handle.
uThe door unlocks and opens in one
motion.
The inner front door handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 118
Inner Handle
Controls
Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
TOC
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
uThis setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be
unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using
the multi-information display * or audio/information screen.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
117
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.
1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock the driver's door using the
master lock switch, all the other doors lock/unlock at
the same time.
To Lock
To Unlock
TOC
Controls
Master Door
Lock Switch
Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.
■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.
Unlock
Index
Home
118
Lock
■ When opening the door
Open the door using the outside door handle.
1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.
uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking
2013 Accord Sedan
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.
■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).
■ Auto Door Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the audio/
information screen or multi-information display *.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
TOC
Controls
■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.
QRG
1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
119
Opening and Closing the Trunk
QRG
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
TOC
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
uAvoid possible damage.
uPrevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Controls
Using the Trunk Opener
Pulling the trunk release to the lower left of
the driver's seat unlocks and opens the trunk.
Trunk
Release
Index
Home
120
2013 Accord Sedan
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Locking the trunk opener
You can lock the trunk release with the master
key * or the built-in key *.
1Locking the trunk opener
Models without smart entry system
If you need to give the key to someone else, give
them the valet key.
TOC
Trunk Release Button
Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
uThe beeper will sound.
1Using the Trunk Release Button *
• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
Controls
Using the Trunk Release Button *
when you get out. Carry it with you.
• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the
trunk and close the lid. The beeper sounds and the
trunk cannot be closed.
• Do not carry the smart entry remote near the trunk
lid when closing it.
• Do not place the smart entry remote around the
rear seat when closing the trunk.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
121
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Remote Transmitter
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.
Trunk Button
TOC
Controls
Trunk Main Switch *
1Trunk Main Switch *
The trunk main switch disables the trunk
release button on the remote transmitter and
the trunk release button on the trunk lid to
protect luggage in the trunk.
Main Switch
ON
OFF
If you need to give the key to someone else, remove
the built-in key from the smart entry remote by
sliding the release knob, and give the remote as a
valet key.
1. Make sure the rear seat-back is not folded
down.
2. Turn off the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
3. Lock the glove box.
4. Lock the trunk release.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 120
Index
Home
122
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener
2013 Accord Sedan
Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
QRG
1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.
Lever
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
123
Security System
QRG
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.
Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START STOP button:
TOC
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START STOP button.
Controls
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
The security system alarm activates when the doors, trunk, or hood are opened
without the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system.
■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash.
■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or smart entry remote. The
system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Home
124
1Immobilizer System
NOTICE
Leaving the ignition key in the vehicle can result in
theft or accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the ignition key with you whenever you
leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ignition
switch.
Security System Alarm
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Immobilizer System
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Setting the security system alarm
1Security System Alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked from outside with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart
entry system.
■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the key,
remote transmitter, smart entry system or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
The security system indicator goes off at the same time.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the key or remote transmitter.
TOC
Controls
■ When the security system alarm sets
The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system is set.
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release or the
emergency trunk opener.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add another
device to it.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
125
uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
TOC
• Some exterior lights flash.
Controls
Panic Button
■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Index
Home
126
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Opening and Closing the Windows
2013 Accord Sedan
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
QRG
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver's side switches can be used to
open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (not
pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than
the driver's seat.
■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
On
Off
Power Window
Lock Button
Driver’s
Window
Switch
Indicator
Front Passenger’s
Window Switch
■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.
The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly.
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
TOC
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0 *1.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
Controls
When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on when
children are in the vehicle.
1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stop closing and reverse
direction.
The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
127
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function
To open: Push the switch down.
Close
To close: Pull the switch up.
Open
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.
TOC
Controls
■ Opening Windows and Moonroof with the Remote *
To open: Press the unlock button twice
within 10 seconds and hold it down for the
second time. If the windows stop midway,
repeat the procedure.
Unlock
Button
Index
Home
128
* Not available on all models
uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key *
To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
Close
Open
Release the key to stop the windows/
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.
TOC
Controls
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
129
Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Use the
switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
Open
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly, then
release.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
TOC
Controls
Close
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone's hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
Tilt
The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.
■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.
■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
Index
1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
NOTICE
Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then
release.
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
130
* Not available on all models
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
2013 Accord Sedan
Ignition Switch *
QRG
1Ignition Switch *
Manual transmission models
(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this
3 WARNING
position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.
Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
the key.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
TOC
Controls
(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
All models
If you open the driver's door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
If the key won't turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
131
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
ENGINE START/STOP Button *
■ Changing the Power Mode
1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range
Automatic Transmission
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
Indicator
Indicator in the button is off.
The steering wheel is locked. The
power to all electrical
components is turned off.
Manual Transmission
Operating Range
Indicator
TOC
Controls
ACCESSORY
Indicator in the button is on.
Indicator in the button blinks
(from ON to ACCESSORY).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
ON
Indicator in the button is on.
All electrical components can be
used.
Without pressing
the brake pedal
Press the button without the shift
lever in (P .
Index
Press the button.
You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.
ON mode:
Indicator in the button is off, if the engine is running.
Without pressing
the clutch pedal
If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the multi-information
display *.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 552
Shift to (P then press the button.
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.
Home
132
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid the battery drain.
When in this mode:
The steering wheel does not lock.
TOC
Controls
You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Index
Home
*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
Continued
133
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
buzzer sounds.
■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder
Models with information display
TOC
Controls
Warning buzzers may sound from inside or/
and outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it to be within its
operational range.
■ When the power mode is in ON
Models with multi-information display
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the information display or multi-information
display notifies the driver inside that the
remote is out.
■ When the power mode is in
Index
Home
134
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.
1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.
*1: Automatic transmission/CVT models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
2013 Accord Sedan
Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position
LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)
Without Smart Entry
System
●
●
●
VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)
●
●
Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.
ACCESSORY
ON (II)
●
●
START (III)
Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.
ON
Indicator is: On
●
●
Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.
TOC
Controls
Power Mode
Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked.
No electrical
components can be
used.
ACCESSORY (I)
QRG
START
Off
With Smart Entry
Indicator-Off
Indicator-On or blinking
IndicatorIndicator-Off
● The mode automatically
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
On (engine is turned off)
●
Some electrical
START/ STOP
power is shut down.
Off (engine is running)
returns to ON after the
● The steering wheel is
components such as the ● All electrical components
Button
engine starts.
locked.
audio system and the
can be used.
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.
Index
Home
135
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Turn Signals
Right Turn
The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.
■ One-touch turn signal
When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
Left Turn
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.
TOC
Controls
Light Switches
1Light Switches
■ Manual Operation
High Beams
Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the position of the
ignition switch*1.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Index
Turns on parking, side marker,
tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.
Home
136
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 76
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Lighting Control
1Automatic Lighting Control
Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
TOC
Controls
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
uYou can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.
Light Sensor
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting
MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN
The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at
Bright
Dark
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
137
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Headlight Integration with Wiper *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
TOC
Controls
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off
within 15 seconds after you remove the key*1 and close the driver's door.
uYou can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
1Headlight Integration with Wiper *
This feature activates during the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
When the ambient light is at dark, the automatic
lighting control feature overrides, and the headlights
come on with or without the wipers sweeping more
than several times.
If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (three minutes, if the switch
is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver's door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.
Fog Lights *
1Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 77
Index
Fog Light Switch
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
138
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights
2013 Accord Sedan
Daytime Running Lights
QRG
Models with bulb type parking lights
The high beam headlights come on slightly dimmer than normal when the following
conditions have been met:
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
Models with LED low beam headlights
TOC
• The power mode is ON.
.
• The parking brake is released.
Controls
• The headlight switch is off, or in
Models with halogen low beam headlights
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch
or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
Models with bulb type parking lights
The high beam headlights return to the original brightness once the headlight
switch is turned on.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
139
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Wipers and Washers
The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
■ MIST
Pull to
use
washer.
The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.
Controls
Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring
MIST
OFF
INT: Low speed with
intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
Change the wiper switch setting according to
the amount of rain.
■ Adjusting the delay
Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
delay.
Long delay
In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield, becoming stuck.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens. When the vehicle starts moving, the
wipers make a single sweep.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest
delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
HI: High speed wipe
Short delay
■ Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever, the wipers make
two or three more sweeps before stopping.
Index
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor is equipped with a breaker that may
stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an
overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a
few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove
the obstacle.
Home
140
NOTICE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.
NOTICE
■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, LO, HI)
TOC
1Wipers and Washers
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control
2013 Accord Sedan
Brightness Control
QRG
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Control Knob
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
On multi-information display
■ Brightness level indicator
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
display.
(Select/Reset) knob switches the
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
parking lights are on.
TOC
Controls
You will hear the beeper when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. The
information display */multi-information
display * will return to its original state several
seconds after you adjust the brightness.
1Brightness Control
The brightness can be set differently for when the
exterior lights are on, and when they are off.
The brightness level is shown on the
information display */multi-information
display * while you are adjusting it.
On information display
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
141
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
QRG
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Models with heating and cooling system
TOC
2013 Accord Sedan
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 20 minutes.
However, if the outside temperature is 18°F
(-8°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Controls
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.
Models with climate control system
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.
Index
Home
142
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *
2013 Accord Sedan
Driving Position Memory System *
QRG
You can store two driver’s seat positions with the driving position memory system.
When you unlock and open the driver’s door with a remote, the seat adjusts
automatically to one of the two preset positions.
The multi-information display * shows you which remote you used to unlock the
vehicle when you enter.
1Driving Position Memory System *
Using the audio/information screen or multiinformation display, you can disable the automatic
seat adjustment function.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
• DRIVER 1 transmitter is linked to memory button 1.
TOC
• DRIVER 2 transmitter is linked to memory button 2.
Controls
DRIVER 1
DRIVER 2
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
143
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDriving Position Memory System *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Storing a Position in Memory
1. Set the power mode to ON. Adjust the
driver’s seat to the desired position.
Memory
Button 1
2. Press the SET button.
uYou will hear a beep, and the memory
button indicator light will blink.
Memory
Button 2
TOC
Controls
SET Button
3. Press and hold memory button (1 or (2
within five seconds of pressing the SET
button.
uOnce the seat position has been
memorized, the indicator light on the
button you pressed stays on.
■ Recalling the Stored Position
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Memory
Button 1
Memory
Button 2
Index
Home
144
1. Move the shift lever to (P .
All models
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Press a memory button ( (1 or (2 ).
uYou will hear a beep, and the indicator
light will blink.
The seat will automatically move to the
memorized position. When it has finished
moving, you will hear a beep, and the
indicator light stays on.
1Storing a Position in Memory
After you press the SET button, the storing operation
will be canceled when:
• You do not press the memory button within five
seconds.
• You readjust the seat position before the doublebeep.
• You set the power mode to any position except
ON.
1Recalling the Stored Position
The seat will stop moving if you:
• Press the SET button, or a memory button
( (1 or (2 ).
• Adjust the seat position.
•
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Shift into any position except (P .
•
Manual transmission models
Release the parking brake.
uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel
2013 Accord Sedan
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
To adjust
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
Lever
To lock
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.
TOC
Controls
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
QRG
1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
Index
Home
145
Adjusting the Mirrors
QRG
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.
■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab
Up
TOC
Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.
1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Adjusting the Seat Positions P. 148
Controls
Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position
■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you. Press the auto
button to turn this function on and off. When
activated, the auto indicator comes on.
1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .
Sensor
Indicator
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Interior Rearview Mirror
Auto Button
Home
146
* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors
2013 Accord Sedan
Power Door Mirrors
QRG
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
Selector Switch
Adjustment Switch
■ Mirror position adjustment
L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.
Outer Segment
The driver side door mirror has outer and inner
segments.
The outer segment is slightly curved to provide
a wider angle view than a standard flat mirror.
This wider view may help you check areas that
are not visible using a standard door mirror.
Controls
■ Expanded View Driver's Mirror
TOC
1Expanded View Driver's Mirror
Objects visible in the outer segment of the driver side
door mirror appear smaller than objects in the rest of
the mirror. But in fact, they are closer than they
appear.
Do not rely on your mirrors. Always look to the side
and behind your vehicle before changing lanes.
Inner Segment
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
147
Adjusting the Seats
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Adjusting the Seat Positions
Allow sufficient
space.
TOC
Move back.
Controls
Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger's seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.
■ Adjusting the front power seat(s) *
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
1Adjusting the Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.
Lumbar Support
Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Always make seat adjustments before driving.
Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)
Index
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Home
148
* Not available on all models
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *
1Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.
Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.
TOC
Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Pull up the lever to
change the angle.
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.
Driver’s seat is shown.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
149
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs
1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
150
The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.
Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adjusting the Head Restraints
1Adjusting the Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints
in all seating positions.
■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions
To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint: Push it down
while pressing the release button.
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
For a head restraint system to work properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.
TOC
Controls
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.
Head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant's head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant's ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
3 WARNING
Index
Home
Continued
151
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Changing the Rear Center Seat Head Restraint Positions
A passenger sitting in the center back seating
position should adjust the height of their head
restraint to an appropriate position before the
vehicle begins moving.
TOC
To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
Controls
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.
■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.
Index
Home
152
1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuAdjusting the Seat Positions
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.
TOC
Controls
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
Index
Home
153
uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seat
1. Remove the center shoulder belt from the
guide.
Guide
TOC
Controls
2. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.
If the rear head restraints get caught on the
front seat-backs, remove the head restraints.
2 Removing and Reinstalling the Head
Restraints P. 152
Home
154
To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until
it locks.
When returning a seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the
center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the guide.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 50
3. Fold the seat-back down.
Index
The rear seat-back can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 64
Center
Shoulder Belt
Release
Lever
1Folding Down the Rear Seat
Also make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seat is properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.
uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest
2013 Accord Sedan
Armrest
QRG
■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest
Pull down the armrest in the center seat-back.
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
155
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches
1Interior Light Switches
■ ON
Off
TOC
Door Activated Position
Controls
Door Activated
Position
On
The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any of the doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver's door.
Models without smart entry system
Off
• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Models with smart entry system
• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver's door but do not open it.
Models without smart entry system
• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system
• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver's door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Models without smart entry system
• When you close the driver's door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system
• When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open without the key in
the ignition switch*1, the interior lights go off after
about 15 minutes.
Index
Home
156
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Map Lights
The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.
1Map Lights
When the ceiling light switch is in the door activated
position and any door is open, the map light will not
go off when you press the lens.
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
157
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
QRG
■ Glove Box
1Glove Box
Pull the handle to open the glove box.
Glove Box
Models with smart entry system
Handle
You can lock the glove box with the built-in
key.
Controls
To Lock
■ Console Compartment
Pull the handle to open the console
compartment.
Home
158
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
TOC
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Interior Convenience Items
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Center Pocket *
Pull the handle to open the pocket.
TOC
Handle
Controls
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
159
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Beverage Holders
1Beverage Holders
■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
NOTICE
Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.
TOC
Controls
■ Rear seat beverage holders
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.
Index
Home
160
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Accessory Power Sockets
1Accessory Power Sockets
The accessory power sockets can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
■ Accessory power socket (console panel)
Open the cover to use it.
NOTICE
Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts or less (15 amps).
■ Accessory power socket (console
compartment)
Open the console lid and the cover to use it.
Controls
To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket
with the engine running.
TOC
When both sockets are being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories should not exceed
180 watts (15 amps).
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
161
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Coat Hook
1Coat Hook
There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.
TOC
Controls
■ Cargo Hooks
1Cargo Hooks
The cargo hooks in the trunk can be used to
install a net for securing items.
Heavy objects may damage the hook.
Make sure any items put on this hook weigh less than
6.6 lbs (3 kg).
Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk,
placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far
forward as possible.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 421
Index
Home
162
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Sunglasses Holder
1Sunglasses Holder
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release the indent. To close, push it again until
it latches.
Keep the holder closed while driving except when
accessing stored items.
You can store eyeglasses and other small
items in this holder.
TOC
Push
Controls
Index
Home
Continued
163
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Front Seat Heaters *
1Front Seat Heaters *
The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
TOC
Controls
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. Briefly press
the switch on the opposite side to turn
the heater off. The indicator will be off.
When a comfortable temperature is
reached, select LO to keep the seat
warm.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
164
* Not available on all models
uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Rear Seat Heaters *
1Rear Seat Heaters *
The ignition switch must be in ON II *1 to use
the seat heaters. The HI setting heats the seats
faster than the LO setting.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
TOC
Controls
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
uThe appropriate indicator will be on
while the seat heater is on. When a
comfortable temperature is reached,
select LO to keep the seat warm.
3 WARNING
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Home
165
Heating and Cooling *
QRG
TOC
Using Vents, Heating and A/C
Mode Buttons
Windshield Defroster Button
Change airflow.
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow from
the defroster vents at the base of the
windshield, and switches the mode to
fresh air.
Floor and defroster vents
Floor vents
Dashboard and floor vents
Dashboard vents
Controls
Fan Control Dial
Adjusts the fan
speed. Rotate the
dial all the way to
OFF to turn
everything off.
Button
Turns on the A/C, selects airflow
from the dashboard vents, and
switches the mode to recirculation.
A/C Button
Press to cool the interior or
dehumidify while heating.
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Temperature
Control Dial
Adjusts the interior
temperature.
(Recirculation) Button
Press the
button and switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on):
Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off):
Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.
Home
166
* Not available on all models
uuHeating and Cooling * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Heating
1Heating
The heater uses engine coolant to warm the
air.
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
When you select
, the mode automatically
switches to fresh air.
.
TOC
■ To rapidly warm up the interior
1To rapidly warm up the interior
Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets
warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in
recirculation mode.
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Select
Controls
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
.
3. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
4. Press the
button (the indicator on).
■ To dehumidify the interior
When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the
interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up.
1. Turn the fan on.
2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning.
Index
Home
Continued
167
uuHeating and Cooling * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Cooling
1To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control
dial.
2. Select
While in the ECON mode, the system has greater
temperature fluctuations.
.
3. Adjust the temperature using the
temperature control dial.
TOC
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows.
4. Press the A/C button (the indicator on).
Pressing the
button bypasses the ECON mode
control, and cools down the interior more rapidly.
Controls
■ To rapidly cool down the interior
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Set the temperature to maximum cool.
3. Press the
button (the indicator on).
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Set the fan to the maximum speed.
2. Press the
Index
Home
168
3. Press the
button.
button.
4. Set the temperature to maximum warm.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1To rapidly defrost the windows
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode.
If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the
windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes
visibility.
Climate Control System *
2013 Accord Sedan
Using Automatic Climate Control
QRG
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that will as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference.
Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor
and back of the vents, and back of
center console *
the center console *
Driver’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
/
(Fan Control) Buttons
Floor and
defroster
vents
(Recirculation) Button
Passenger’s Side
Temperature
Control Buttons
A/C (Air Conditioning)
Button
Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
buttons.
3. Press the
(On/Off) button to cancel.
■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation Mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh Air Mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
* Not available on all models
Continued
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.
The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that was pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.
If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on auto, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
TOC
Controls
AUTO Button
Floor vents
1Using Automatic Climate Control
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.
Pressing the
button switches the climate
control system between on and off. When turned on,
the system returns to your last selection.
Index
Home
169
uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
button turns the air
conditioning system on and automatically
switches the system to fresh air mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.
TOC
Controls
■ To rapidly defrost the windows
2. Press the
Home
170
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.
1. Press the
Index
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
1To rapidly defrost the windows
button.
button.
After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.
uuClimate Control System * uSynchronized Mode
2013 Accord Sedan
Synchronized Mode
QRG
1Synchronized Mode
When you press the
button, the system changes
to synchronized mode.
When the system is in dual mode, the driver side
temperature and the passenger side temperature can
be set separately.
Models with navigation system
TOC
Controls
The system adjusts each temperature based on the
information of the sunlight sensor and the sun
position updated by the navigation system’s GPS.
You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system will switch to the synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using driver’s side temperature control buttons.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.
Index
Home
171
uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors
QRG
Automatic Climate Control Sensors
The automatic climate control system is
equipped with a sunlight sensor and an
interior temperature sensor. Do not cover or
spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor
TOC
Controls
Index
Home
172
Temperature
Sensor
2013 Accord Sedan
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.
Audio System
USB Port .......................................... 175
Auxiliary Input Jack .......................... 176
Audio System Theft Protection * ....... 177
Region Setting ................................. 178
Audio Remote Controls.................... 179
Models with one display
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 180
Audio/Information Screen ................ 181
Display Setup ................................... 186
Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 187
Playing a CD .................................... 190
Playing an iPod®............................... 193
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 196
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 198
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 201
* Not available on all models
Models with two displays
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 203
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 204
Audio/Information Screen ................ 207
Display Setup ................................... 213
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 214
Playing XM® Radio ........................... 218
Playing a CD .................................... 221
Playing an iPod®............................... 224
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 228
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 231
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 234
Models with navigation system
Audio System Basic Operation ...... 236
Audio with Touch Screen ................. 237
Audio/Information Screen ................ 239
Display Setup................................... 244
Voice Control Operation .................. 245
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 253
Playing XM® Radio........................... 257
Playing a CD .................................... 260
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio.....263
Playing an iPod® .............................. 273
Playing Internet Radio ...................... 281
Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 284
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 287
Audio Error Messages ...................... 289
General Information on the Audio System.....295
Customized Features........................ 299
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.. 337
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 339, 376
Compass * .......................................... 414
Index
Home
173
Audio System
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
About Your Audio System
Models with navigation system
1About Your Audio System
See the Navigation System Manual for information on the navigation system.
The audio system features AM/FM radio and the XM® Radio service *. It can also play
audio CDs, WMA/MP3/AAC files, Hard Disc Drive (HDD) audio *, USB flash drives,
and iPod®, iPhone® and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
icons on the touchscreen interface *.
XM® Radio is available on a subscription basis only.
For more information on XM® Radio, contact a
dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 295
XM® Radio is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
XM® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio, Inc.
TOC
iPod®
Features
USB Flash
Drive
Remote Controls
Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not
supported.
iPod® and iPhone® are registered trademarks owned
by Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
Index
Home
174
* Not available on all models
uuAudio SystemuUSB Port
2013 Accord Sedan
USB Port
QRG
Install the iPod® dock connector or the USB
flash drive to the USB port.
1USB Port
• Do not leave the iPod® or USB flash drive in the
•
•
•
•
If the audio system does not recognize the iPod®, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer's instructions
provided with the iPod® or visit www.apple.com/
ipod.
TOC
Features
•
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod® or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
Index
Home
175
uuAudio SystemuAuxiliary Input Jack
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Auxiliary Input Jack
Use the jack to connect standard audio devices.
Use the jack to connect standard audio
Models with one display
devices.
1. Open the AUX cover.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
176
Models with two
displays
Models with
navigation system
2. Connect a standard audio device to the
input jack using a 1/8 inch (3.5 mm) stereo
miniplug.
u The audio system automatically switches
to the AUX mode.
1Auxiliary Input Jack
Models with one display
You can return to the AUX mode by pressing the
AUX button.
Models with two displays
Models with navigation system
You can return to the AUX mode by selecting
Change Source on the Audio menu screen or
Source on the touchscreen.
You cannot use the auxiliary input jack if you replace
the audio system.
uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection *
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio System Theft Protection *
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead.
■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Set the power mode to ON, and turn on the audio system.
u If you set the power mode to ACCESSORY, you will be requested to enter the
audio security code. See step 3.
3. Enter the audio security code using the touch screen. If you enter an incorrect
digit, continue to the last digit, then try again. If you do not enter code correctly
after 10 tries, leave the system for one hour before trying again, or visit a dealer
to have the system reset.
Find the audio system's security code and serial
number label in your owner’s manual kit.
We recommend that you write down the serial
number in this owner’s manual.
Do not store the label in your vehicle. If you lose the
label, you must first retrieve the serial number, and
then obtain the code.
You can find out about your serial number and
security code from a dealer.
U.S. models
You can register the security code at Owner Link
(owners.honda.com.), and find information on how
to retrieve the serial number and obtain the code at
radio-navicode.honda.com.
TOC
Features
2. Press and hold the power button again for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the system’s control unit recognizes that
the system is in your vehicle.
If the control unit fails to recognize, Enter PIN Code appears on the audio/
information screen.
QRG
1Audio System Theft Protection *
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
177
uuAudio SystemuRegion Setting
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with two displays
Region Setting
1Region Setting
The audio system’s region setting will be lost when the battery is disconnected or
goes dead.
If the Region Select screen appears, you need to set the region for the audio
system. Follow the steps below:
1. Press
2. Rotate
TOC
Features
Index
Home
178
to select OK.
to select the region you live in, then press
.
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .
to select Yes,
The region setting is required only when the battery
power is temporarily disconnected. It is set to your
vehicle’s region type by the factory.
You cannot change the setting once you have
completed the setting procedure. Contact a dealer if
you selected an incorrect region.
uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio Remote Controls
QRG
Allows you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
FM AM XM * CD HDD * USB iPod®
Button
Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * AhaTM* AUX
(+ Button
Button
(- Button
1Audio Remote Controls
The CD mode appears only when a CD is loaded.
(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : Increases the volume.
Press (- : Decreases the volume.
TOC
Features
Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : Selects the next preset radio station.
Press : Selects the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : Selects the next strong station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous strong station.
• When listening to a CD, HDD *, iPod®, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press : Goes back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a CD, HDD * or USB flash drive
Press and hold : Skips to the next folder.
Press and hold : Goes back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Pandora® *
Press : Skips to the next song.
Press and hold : Selects the next station.
Press and hold : Selects the previous station.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
179
Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with one display
1Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
Use the selector knob or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
TOC
Button Selector Knob
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
Features
MENU button: Press to select any mode.
The available mode includes Change Source,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text,
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Index
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Home
180
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press
to select.
to enter.
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 188
2 Radio text P. 189
2 Music Search P. 191
P. 194
P. 199
2 Scan P. 192
P. 200
2 Random/Repeat P. 192
P. 195
P. 200
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio/Information Screen
QRG
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Switching the Display
Press the
(display) button to change the display.
(Display) Button
Audio
Trip Computer
(Current Drive)
TOC
Audio/Information Screen
Features
Clock/Wallpaper
Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)
Index
Home
Continued
181
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
TOC
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Features
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
Index
Home
182
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•
2 USB Port P. 175
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
•
•
TOC
Features
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
4. Rotate
to select Add New Wallpaper,
then press .
uThe preview of the imported data is
displayed.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
6. Press
to save the data.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Continued
Index
Home
183
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Select wallpaper
1Wallpaper Setup
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
TOC
to select Set, then press
.
.
Features
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock, Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate
Index
Home
184
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.
.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.
to select
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
2013 Accord Sedan
Adjusting the Sound
SETTINGS Button
QRG
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
1Adjusting the Sound
2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
Selector Knob
Rotate
choices:
to select Sound, then press
.
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
to scroll through the following
TOC
Bass
Features
Treble
Fader
Balance
SVC
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Index
Home
185
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then
press .
TOC
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting.
Features
■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
,
3. Rotate
to select Background Color
then press .
Index
Home
186
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .
You can change the Contrast and Black level
settings in the same manner.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
and
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
Tune to the selected station.
Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.
Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Features
FM/AM Button
Press to select a band.
Index
Home
Continued
187
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
1Playing AM/FM Radio
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
2. Rotate
while listening to an FM station.
to select the station, then press
.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
TOC
1. Press
Features
2. Rotate
while listening to an FM station.
to select Refresh, then press
.
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 179
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the MENU
screen.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset button memory. FM1 and FM2 let you
store 6 stations each.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
Index
Home
188
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio text
1Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.
.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press
.
TOC
to select Stop, or press the BACK button.
Features
To turn off scan, press
Index
Home
189
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG
Playing a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the CD button.
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
Features
CD Button
Press to play a CD.
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Index
Home
190
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change tracks/folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a CD
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a folder.
4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate
to select a file, then press
.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
TOC
Features
Folder Selection
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
File Selection
Index
Home
Continued
191
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
TOC
Features
Random/Repeat
is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
Index
Home
192
.
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Playing an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB Port, then press the AUX
button.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod® is
connected.
Album Art
TOC
Features
AUX Button
Press to select iPod® (if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display or cancel a
setting.
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Continued
Index
Home
193
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1Playing an iPod®
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
4. Press
5. Rotate
TOC
Features
Index
Home
194
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
to select a menu.
to display the items on that menu.
to select an item, then press
.
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current file.
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
TOC
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
.
Index
Home
Continued
195
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
iPhone
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 318
Press the AUX button to select Pandora mode.
TOC
Audio/Information Screen
Features
Album Art
Rating Icon
Selector Knob
Turn to switch to another station.
AUX Button
Press to select Pandora®.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Skip Button
Press
to skip a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Index
Preset Button (1)
Press to switch the mode between
pause and resume.
Home
Preset Button (2)
Press to select Like.
196
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Preset Button (5)
Press to select Bookmark Artist.
Preset Button (4)
Press to select Bookmark Track.
Preset Button (3)
Press to select Dislike.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like
• Dislike
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select an item, then press
.
TOC
Features
■ Operating a menu item
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 292
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
Index
Home
197
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG
Playing a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the AUX button.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is
connected.
TOC
Features
AUX Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/ (Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.
198
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Turn to change folders.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Index
Home
Seek/Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a folder.
4. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
5. Rotate
to select a file, then press
.
Folder Selection
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 295
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
TOC
Features
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
File Selection
Index
Home
Continued
199
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat
is selected.
TOC
Features
■ To turn off a play mode
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
Index
Home
200
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
.
.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
Audio/
Information
Screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
VOL/
(Power/volume)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
AUX Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.
TOC
Features
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
Skip Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Preset Button (1)
Press to resume
playing a file.
Preset Button (2)
Press to pause a
playing file.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
Index
Home
Continued
201
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the AUX button.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press
.
1Switching to HFL
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 339
Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Button
202
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack, you may need to press the AUX button
repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
1. Press the MENU button.
Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
Home
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
■ To pause or resume a file
■ Switching to HFL
Index
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
Button
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with two displays
1Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the selector knob, DISP and BACK
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
buttons to access some audio functions.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Selector Knob
Button
BACK Button
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 216
2 Save Preset P. 215
P. 220
2 Radio text P. 217
2 Music Search P. 222
P. 226
P. 232
2 Scan P. 223
P. 233
2 Random/Repeat P. 223
P. 227
P. 233
TOC
Features
Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection.
Also press to select any mode. The available
mode includes Change Source, Station List,
Save Preset, Radio Text, Music Search, and
play modes. Play modes can be also selected
from Scan, Random/Repeat, and so on.
to select.
to enter.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Index
Home
203
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio with Touch Screen
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.
1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.
■ Selecting an Audio Source
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select Source.
Use the
TOC
Features
Source List Icons
Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
■ Displaying the Menu Items
Select More.
Index
Home
204
Select More to display the menu items.
Menu Items
/
/
/
icons to turn the page.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
Select
Select
1Changing the Clock/Screen Settings
.
to adjust the clock and screen settings.
■ Changing the Clock settings
2 Setting the Clock P. 106
TOC
Features
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Blackout
Sets the screen black out timing.
■ Changing the Screen settings
1. Select Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.
Index
Home
Continued
205
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adjusting the Sound
1Adjusting the Sound
1. Select More, then Sound Settings.
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 212
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.
TOC
Features
■ Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
Select
Select
.
to switch to the phone operation screen.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 339
Index
Home
206
1Displaying the Phone Operation Screen
The phone operation screen is available when a
phone is paired to HFL.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio/Information Screen
QRG
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Switching the Display
Using the
Press the
button
(display) button to change the display.
(Display) Button
Audio
Trip Computer
(Current Drive)
TOC
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Clock/Wallpaper
Trip Computer
(History of Trip A)
Index
Home
Continued
207
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Using the DISP button
Function Change Screen
DISP Button
TOC
Features
Selector Knob
Press the DISP button to go to the Function Change screen.
Rotate
to select Audio, Phone, Info or Setting and press
.
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 339
Index
Home
208
■ Setting
Enters the customizing menu screen. 2Customized Features P. 299
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Info
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper information.
Press , rotate
to select an item, then press .
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distance traveled for the current trip,
as well as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three
driving cycles.
Features
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
TOC
■ Deleting the history manually
1. Press
2. Rotate
on the History of Trip A screen.
to select Delete History, then press
.
3. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .
to select Yes,
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
Index
Home
Continued
209
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•
2 USB Port P. 175
TOC
Features
2. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type, then
Wallpaper.
4. Rotate
to select Add New, then press .
uThe picture name is displayed on the list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
Index
Home
210
6. Press
to save the data.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
•
•
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Select wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.
3. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
TOC
Features
5. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
.
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then Wallpaper
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
3. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
4. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.
to select
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
5. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
Index
6. Rotate
to select OK, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
Home
211
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Adjusting the Sound
DISP (SETTINGS) Button
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
1Adjusting the Sound
2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate to select Sound, then press
.
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
Selector Knob
BACK Button
TOC
Rotate
choices:
to scroll through the following
Features
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SUBW *
Index
SVC
Subwoofer *
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Home
212
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
2013 Accord Sedan
Display Setup
QRG
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Display.
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then
press .
to adjust the setting.
Features
4. Rotate
TOC
■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press and hold the DISP button to go to the
Settings screen.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other.
3. Rotate
to select Background Color,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .
Index
Home
213
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing AM/FM Radio
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Presets
Select to store a station.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
Index
Home
214
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
More
Select to display the menu items.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Preset Memory
1Playing AM/FM Radio
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Selector Knob
2. Press
3. Rotate
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 179
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then
press .
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
You can also switch the mode by pressing
and
selecting Change Source on the Audio menu
screen.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Index
Home
Continued
215
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
TOC
Features
Index
Home
216
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press
3. Rotate
to select the station, then press
.
.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press
3. Rotate
to select UPDATE LIST, then press
.
.
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio text
1Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press
.
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Selector Knob
1. Press
2. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Scan, then press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Audio with Touch Screen
TOC
Features
To turn off scan, press
.
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
Index
Home
217
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing XM® Radio
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an XM® Radio category.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Presets
Select to store a station.
Index
Home
218
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.
More
Select to display the menu items.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Play the XM® Radio
1Playing XM® Radio
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 179
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 204
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
Selector Knob
2. Press
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
3. Rotate
to select XM Tune Mode, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
5. Rotate
to select Channel List, then press
6. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press
.
TOC
.
Features
.
Audio with Touch Screen
2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or the
preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
Index
Home
Continued
219
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Preset Memory
1Playing XM® Radio
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Selector Knob
2. Press
3. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Save Preset, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then
press .
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Index
Home
220
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
Playing a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
TOC
Features
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
More
Select to display the menu items.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Index
Home
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
Continued
221
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a CD
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
TOC
Features
Folder Selection
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
File Selection
4. Rotate
Index
Home
222
to select a file, then press
.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
.
3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob
1. Press
2. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
Index
Home
223
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
QRG
Playing an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
Album Art Icon
Source
Select to change an audio source.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Index
Home
224
More
Select to display the menu items.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select an Album
1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar
Album AAA
Artist AAA
Album Image
TOC
Features
1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
Index
Home
Continued
225
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
3. Press
4. Rotate
TOC
Features
Folder Selection
File Selection
Index
Home
226
to select a menu.
to display the items on that menu.
to select an item, then press
.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob
1. Press
2. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
.
Index
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
Home
Continued
227
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
U.S. models
Compatible phones only
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
1Playing Internet Radio
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
iPhone
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 318
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
TOC
Audio/Information Screen
Features
Album Art
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Rating Icon
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
Index
Home
228
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
* Not available on all models
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Like
• Dislike
• Station List
• Change Source
• Bookmark Track
• Bookmark Artist
• Play/Pause
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select an item and press
.
TOC
Features
■ Operating a menu item
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 292
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
Index
Home
Continued
229
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ AhaTM Radio Menu
1AhaTM Radio Menu
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• 15sec Back
• Play/Pause
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
• View text
• Change Source
• View list
• Dislike
TOC
■ Operating a menu item
Features
to select an item and press
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio P. 294
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
.
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
Index
Home
230
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing a USB Flash Drive
QRG
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.
TOC
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Selector Knob
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
VOL/ (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Features
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
Audio with Touch Screen
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Index
Home
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
Continued
231
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 295
1. Press . Rotate
to select Music
Search, then press .
2. Rotate
to select a folder.
3. Press
to change the display to a list of
files in that folder.
4. Rotate
TOC
Folder Selection
Features
File Selection
Index
Home
232
to select a file, then press
.
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Selector Knob
1. Press
to switch to the Audio menu
screen.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Selector Knob
1. Press
2. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
Index
Home
233
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 347
Audio/
Information
Screen
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL/
(Volume/Power)
Knob
Press to turn the
audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Pause Icon
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to
change files.
Index
Home
234
More
Select to display
the menu items.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folder.
Play Icon
Selector Knob
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
BACK Button
Press to go back to
the previous display.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
TOC
Features
■ To pause or resume a file
Selector knob
1. Press
2. Rotate
to switch to the Audio menu screen.
to select Play or Pause, then press
.
Audio with Touch Screen
Select the play icon or pause icon.
■ Switching to HFL
1Switching to HFL
Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 339
Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Button
Button
Index
Home
235
Audio System Basic Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with navigation system
1Audio System Basic Operation
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Use the interface dial or MENU button to
BACK Button
MENU Button
access some audio functions.
Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.
Button
TOC
Interface Dial
Features
Interface dial: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set
your selection. Move right, left, up or down to
select secondary menu.
MENU button: Press to select any mode. The
,
available mode includes Change Source
,
Station List, Save Preset, Radio Text
Music Search, and play modes. Play modes
can be also selected from Scan, Random/
Repeat, and so on.
BACK button: Press to go back to the
previous display.
Index
Home
236
button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and make an adjustment.
uEach time you press
, the mode
switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and off mode.
Voice Control System
The audio system is voice operable. See the
navigation system manual for details.
These indications are used to show how to operate
the interface dial.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
Move
,
,
or
to select secondary menu.
Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 255
2 Save Preset P. 254
P. 259
2 Radio text P. 256
2 Music Search P. 261
P. 265
P. 275
P. 285
2 Scan P. 262
P. 266
P. 286
2 Random/Repeat P. 262
P. 266
P. 276
P. 286
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio with Touch Screen
QRG
Use the touch screen to operate the audio system.
1Audio with Touch Screen
Icons that appear on the screen vary by the source
selected.
■ Selecting an Audio Source
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select Source.
Use the
/
/
/
icons to turn the page.
TOC
Select Source, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Features
Source List Icons
■ Displaying the Menu Items
Select More.
Menu Items
Index
Select More to display the menu items.
Home
Continued
237
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio with Touch Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Adjusting the Sound
1Adjusting the Sound
1. Select More, then Sound Settings.
Select Off, Low, Mid or High for the SVC setting.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 243
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.
TOC
Features
■ Changing the Screen Settings
1. Select More, then Screen Settings.
2. Use (+ , (- or others to adjust the setting.
Index
Home
238
1Changing the Screen Settings
The followings are adjustable screen settings:
• Brightness
• Contrast
• Black Level
• Display
Changes between the daytime or nighttime
modes.
• Beep
Mutes a beep that sounds every time you touch the
screen.
• Keyboard
Changes the on-screen keyboard from the
alphabetical order to the qwerty type.
• Blackout
Sets the screen black out timing.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
Audio/Information Screen
QRG
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.
■ Switching the Display
Press the
1Switching the Display
You can also use the AUDIO, NAV, PHONE and
INFO buttons to go to the corresponding display.
(display) button to change the display.
(Display) Button
Audio
Navigation
TOC
Features
Audio/Information Screen
Info
PHONE Button
INFO Button
NAV Button
AUDIO Button
Phone
Index
Home
Continued
239
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Navigation
Shows the navigation screen. 2Refer to the Navigation System Manual
■ Phone
Shows the HFL information. 2Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 376
■ Info
TOC
Shows the Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper and other information. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
Features
■ Trip computer (Current Drive)
Shows the range, and instant and average fuel economy of the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy from your last trip.
■ Trip computer (History of Trip A)
Shows the range, average fuel economy and distances traveled for the current trip, as well
as the average fuel economy and distances traveled during the last three driving cycles.
Each time you reset the trip meter A, the information on the display updates. The
history of the previous three driving cycles is kept.
■ Deleting the history manually
1. Move
on the History of Trip A screen to select Delete History, then press
Index
2. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen. Rotate
then press .
Home
■ Clock/Wallpaper
240
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
.
to select Yes,
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Wallpaper Setup
1Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•
2 USB Port P. 175
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
TOC
Features
3. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
uRepeat the procedure to select Clock,
Clock/Wallpaper Type.
•
•
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 6 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,680 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 420 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
4. Move
to select Wallpaper.
uThe screen will change to the wallpaper
list.
5. Move
to select Add New, then press
.
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture.
uThe preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Press , then move to select Start
Import.
uThe confirmation message will appear.
Then the display will return to the
wallpaper list.
Continued
Index
Home
241
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Select wallpaper
TOC
Features
Index
Home
242
1Wallpaper Setup
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Set, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Preview
and press
to see a preview at full-size screen.
■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Clock/Wallpaper Type.
3. Move
to select Wallpaper.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
5. Press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
7. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.
.
To go back to the previous screen, press
OK, or press the BACK button.
to select
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound
2013 Accord Sedan
Adjusting the Sound
QRG
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
3.
Rotate
to select Sound, then press .
1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.
SETTINGS Button
Rotate
choices:
to scroll through the following
TOC
Features
Bass
Treble
Fader
Balance
SUBW
SVC
Subwoofer
Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation
Index
Home
243
uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.
■ Changing the Screen Brightness
1Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Brightness, then
press .
TOC
4. Rotate
to adjust the setting.
Features
■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
,
3. Rotate
to select Background Color
then press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .
Index
Home
244
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
Voice Control Operation
QRG
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation of most of
the navigation system functions.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on the
steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.
1Voice Control Operation
■ Voice Recognition
1Voice Recognition
• Close the windows and moonroof.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.
TOC
Features
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the navigation voice control
system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.
• Speak clearly in a clear, natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.
• Refer to the Voice Help feature.
2 Refer to the navigation System Manual
Index
Home
Continued
245
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Voice Portal Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Voice Portal screen.
• Call Your contact name
■ Navigation Commands
■ On Screen Commands
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
• Call Phone Number
• Find nearest POI category name
• Go home
TOC
• Route menu
Features
• Cancel route
■ Info Commands
■ Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Trip computer
The system accepts these commands on any
screen.
• Call by number
• Call by name
Contacts that are imported from your
phone to the vehicle are all made available
by voice. Voice Tags can also be recorded
for each of your Speed Dial entries.
Index
Home
246
• Traffic information
• Display clock
• Display wallpaper
When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Climate Control Commands
Driver temperature up
Driver temperature down
Passenger temperature up
Passenger temperature down
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Driver temperature max heat
Driver temperature max cool
Passenger temperature max heat
Passenger temperature max cool
Climate control sync on*1
Climate control sync off*1
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
■ Audio Commands
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
■ Song By VoiceTM commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Music search
List album (specify album)
List artist (specify artist)
List composer (specify composer)
List genre (specify genre)
List playlist (specify playlist)
Play album (specify album)
Play artist (specify artist)
Play composer (specify composer)
Play genre (specify genre)
Play playlist (specify playlist)
Play song (specify song)
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
TOC
Features
The system accepts these commands on
most screens.
• Climate control automatic*1
• Climate control off*1
• Air conditioner on*1
• Air conditioner off*1
• Climate control defrost on*1
• Climate control defrost off*1
• Rear defrost on*1
• Rear defrost off*1
• Climate control fresh air
• Climate control recirculate
• Climate control vent
• Climate control bi-level
• Climate control floor
• Climate control floor and defrost
• Fan speed up
• Fan speed down
• Fan speed # (#: 1 to 7)
• Temperature # degrees (#: 57 to 87°F, 15
to 29°C)
• Driver temperature # degrees (#: 57 to
87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Passenger temperature # degrees (#: 57
to 87°F, 15 to 29°C)
• Temperature up
• Temperature down
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
■ Using Song By VoiceTM
Song By VoiceTM is a feature that allows you
to select music from your Hard Disc Drive or
iPod® device using your voice.
Index
To activate this mode, you must press the
(Talk) button on the Voice Portal screen
and say:“Music search.”
Home
Continued
247
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Features
■ HDD commands
■ Radio commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hard Disc Drive play
Hard Disc Drive play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Hard Disc Drive skip forward
Hard Disc Drive skip back
Hard Disc Drive album up*2
Hard Disc Drive album down*2
Hard Disc Drive track up
Hard Disc Drive track down
Hard Disc Drive playlist up*2
Hard Disc Drive playlist down*2
Hard Disc Drive track random*1
Hard Disc Drive track repeat*1
Hard Disc Drive track scan*1
Hard Disc Drive normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
Index
Home
248
*2: These commands are available only in the
corresponding playback mode.
For example, “Artist” commands are available only
in “Artist” mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Audio on*1
Audio off*1
Radio on*1
Radio off*1
Radio select FM
Radio select AM
Radio tune to # FM
(#: frequency from 87.7 to 107.9)
Radio tune to # AM
(#: frequency from 530 [five thirty] to
1710 [seventeen ten])
Radio seek up
Radio seek down
Radio next station
Radio preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio FM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
Radio AM preset # (#: 1 to 6)
Radio scan*1
Radio select XM
XM channel #
(#: 0 to 255 [two fifty five])
XM channel down
XM category up
XM category down
XM preset # (#: 1 to 12)
XM scan*1
XM category mode
XM channel mode
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
NOTE:
Radio volume levels cannot be controlled
using voice control.
■ Disc commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Disc play
Disc play track # (#: 1 to 30)
Disc skip forward
Disc skip back
Disc track random*1
Disc track repeat*1
Disc track scan*1
Disc folder up
Disc folder down
Disc folder random*1
Disc folder repeat*1
Disc folder scan*1
Disc normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ iPod® commands
■ USB commands
■ Bluetooth® Audio commands
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
USB play
USB play track # (#: 1 to 30)
USB skip forward
USB skip back
USB track random*1
USB track repeat*1
USB track scan*1
USB folder up
USB folder down
USB folder random*1
USB folder repeat*1
USB folder scan*1
USB normal play
*1: These commands toggle the function on and off,
so the command may not match your intended action.
Bluetooth Audio play
Bluetooth Audio skip forward
Bluetooth Audio skip back
Bluetooth Audio group up
Bluetooth Audio group down
Bluetooth Audio pause
Bluetooth Audio resume
Bluetooth Audio track random
Bluetooth Audio track repeat
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.
TOC
Features
iPod play
iPod play track # (#: 1 to 30)
iPod skip forward
iPod skip back
iPod track shuffle*1
iPod album shuffle*1
iPod track repeat*1
iPod normal play
What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?
■ AUX commands
• Auxiliary play
Index
Home
Continued
249
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TOC
Features
Index
Home
250
■ Pandora® commands
■ AhaTM Radio commands
■ Internet service commands
The system accepts these commands while
the Pandora® is playing.
• Pandora play
• Pandora skip forward
• Pandora station up
• Pandora station down
• Pandora pause
• Pandora resume
• Pandora thumbs up
• Pandora thumbs down
The system accepts these commands while
the AhaTM is playing.
• Aha radio play
• Aha radio skip forward
• Aha radio skip back
• Aha radio station up
• Aha radio station down
• Aha radio resume
• Aha radio pause
• Aha radio like
• Aha radio dislike
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Internet service play
Internet service skip forward*1
Internet service skip back*1
Internet service station up*1
Internet service station down*1
Internet service resume*1
Internet service pause*1
Internet service like*1
Internet service dislike*1
*1: The system accepts these commands while the
Internet service is playing.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Keyboard Entry Commands
In keyboard screen, letters can be selected
by saying each individual letter or by saying
a keyward phrase. These keyward phrases
are:
■ Letters
Say . . .
Or say . . .
Apple/Alpha
Boy/Bravo
Charlie
Dog/Delta
Edward/Echo
Frank/Foxtrot
George/Golf
Henry/Hotel
Igloo/India
John/Juliet
King/Kilo
Larry/Lima
Mary/Mike
Nancy/November
Oscar
Paul/Papa
Queen/Quebec
Robert/Romeo
Sam/Sierra
Tom/Tango
Uncle/Uniform
Victor
William/Whiskey
X-ray
Yellow/Yankee
Zebra/Zulu
Number . . .
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Or say . . .
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
TOC
Features
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
■ Numbers
Index
Home
Continued
251
uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Symbols
TOC
Features
Index
Home
252
Symbol . . .
!
“
#
$
%
&
‘
(
)
~
/
<
>
{
}
■ Accented letters
Or say . . .
Hyphen
Exclamation point
Double Quote
Pound
Dollar
Percent
Ampersand
Apostrophe
Open Parenthesis
Close Parenthesis
Tilde
Slash
Less than
Greater than
Open Brace
Close Brace
Symbol . . .
À
Â
Ä
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Î
Ï
Ô
Ù
Û
Ü
Or say . . .
A grave
A circumflex
A umlaut
C cedilla
E grave
E acute
E circumflex
E umlaut
I grave
I circumflex
I umlaut
O circumflex
U grave
U circumflex
U umlaut
■ Punctuation marks
Symbol . . .
@
^
*
_
`
,
.
?
:
;
+
Or say . . .
At Sign
Caret
Asterisk
Underscore
Back Quote
Comma
Dot
Question mark
Colon
Semicolon
Plus
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Presets
Select to store a station.
TOC
Tune Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to tune the radio
frequency.
Features
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Source
Select to change a band or change
an audio source.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to search up and
down the selected band for a
station with a strong signal.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-6 (AM) or 1-12 (FM).
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
Continued
Index
Home
253
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Preset Memory
1Playing AM/FM Radio
You can control the AM/FM radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
2. Select More.
Home
254
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 179
You can also switch the mode by pressing the MENU
button and selecting Change Source on the Audio
menu screen.
3. Select Save Preset.
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Index
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio Data System (RDS)
1Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press
3. Rotate
to select the station, then press
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.
.
.
■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
TOC
2. Rotate
to select Station List, then press
3. Rotate
to select Refresh, then press
Features
1. Press the MENU button while listening to an FM station.
.
.
Index
Home
Continued
255
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radio text
1Radio text
Display the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press
.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
TOC
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press
Features
To turn off scan, press
to select Cancel Scan, or press the BACK button.
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.
Index
Home
256
.
The text indicator comes on when you received a text
message. The indicator stays on until you read the
message.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
Playing XM® Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Audio/Information Screen
Audio with Touch Screen
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Presets
Select to store a station.
To listen to a stored channel,
select 1-12.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Category Up/Down Icons
Select
or
to display and select
an XM® Radio category.
TOC
Features
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Source
Select to change an audio source.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
In channel mode, select and hold to
change the channel rapidly.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to tune the radio
frequency.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
Continued
Index
Home
257
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Play the XM® Radio
1Playing XM® Radio
You can control the XM® radio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
1. Select the XM® mode.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 179
2 Audio with Touch Screen P. 237
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
Interface Dial
2. Press the MENU button.
TOC
Features
3. Rotate
to select XM Tune Mode, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Channel Mode or Category Mode, then press
5. Rotate
to select Channel List, then press
6. Rotate
to select a channel from a list, then press
.
.
.
Audio with Touch Screen
2. Select More.
3. Select Tune Mode.
4. Select CH Channel Mode or CAT Category Mode.
5. Select a channel using the , ,
,
icons on the tune mode screen or
the preset numbers (1-12) on the preset mode screen.
Index
Home
258
There may be instances when XM® Radio does not
broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This
does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying XM® Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Preset Memory
1Playing XM® Radio
You can store 12 XM® stations into the preset
memory.
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
Interface Dial
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Save Preset, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select the preset number you want to store that station, then press
and hold .
TOC
2. Select More.
3. Select Save Preset.
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
4. Select the preset number you want to store that station.
Index
Home
259
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
QRG
Playing a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs and CD-RWs in either MP3, WMA, or
AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, select the CD mode.
Audio/Information Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Audio with Touch Screen
TOC
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder in MP3, WMA,
or AAC.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
Index
Home
260
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks
(files in MP3, WMA, or AAC).
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track/file.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a CD
(MP3/WMA/AAC)
NOTICE
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can
cause the CD to jam in the unit.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.
TOC
Features
Folder Selection
Text data appears on the display under the following
circumstances:
• When you select a new folder, file, or track.
• When you change the audio mode to CD.
• When you insert a CD.
If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot,
the system reloads the CD automatically after several
seconds.
You can control a CD audio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
File Selection
Index
Home
Continued
261
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second
sampling of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3,
WMA, or AAC).
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track or file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
TOC
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
Index
Home
262
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in
the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track/file.
Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files
in the current folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks/files in random
order.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function plays tracks from music CDs that have
been recorded onto the built-in HDD. You can arrange the tracks in playlists or play
the tracks using various search methods.
Audio/Information Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Audio with Touch Screen
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
TOC
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
CD Slot
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot.
(CD Eject) Button
Press to eject a CD.
Playlist/Album Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next playlist/
album, and
to skip to the
beginning of the previous playlist/
album.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a track.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
SETTINGS Button
Press to go the Setting menu screen.
Continued
Index
Home
263
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Recording a Music CD to HDD
1Recording a Music CD to HDD
The songs on music CDs are automatically recorded by factory default to the HDD
the first time you play each disc. You can then play the songs directly from the HDD.
Recording Indicator
You can add tracks to user playlists, where you can
mix and match tracks from other CDs recorded on
the HDD.
2 Editing an Album or Playlist P. 267
2 Editing Track Information P. 270
If you stop the engine or the power system is turned
off while recording a CD, there may be pauses
between songs when you play back from the HDD.
Recording
Ready to record
Repeat, random, and scan functions are not available
during recording.
TOC
Features
You can play music from other sources (e.g., XM,
HDD, etc.) while recording.
■ Stop Recording
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Cancel Record to HDD, then press
.
Please note that there is no compensation offered in
the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or
the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.
Clearing the HDD
Any music tracks stored on the HDD can be deleted.
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 336
■ Recording a CD Manually
1Recording a CD Manually
Use this feature to set up the music search abilities
when using Song By Voice™ (SBV) commands.
1. Press the MENU button.
Index
Home
264
2. Rotate
to select Rec to HDD, then press
.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Track from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
Music tracks recorded on HDD cannot be recorded
onto CDs or other devices.
Tracks are recorded at four times the playback speed
using ultra-efficient compression technology;
therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the
original.
If the HDD is ever replaced, all music data is lost and
cannot be recovered.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the display.
2 Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio P. 290
TOC
Features
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a track from the Music Search list.
u Title information is displayed if found in
the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database) stored on the HDD.
u The HDD has two types of playlists:
original playlists and user playlists. An
original playlist is automatically created
for each album when a music CD is
recorded. You can customize up to six
user playlists provided on the HDD by
adding tracks from your original playlists.
You can control the HDD audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 277
Index
Home
Continued
265
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Albums: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first track in each album.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all
tracks on HDD.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a track.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
TOC
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
.
2. Select Scan or Random/Repeat
3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
Index
Home
266
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Album: Repeats all tracks in the current
album.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current track.
Random in Album: Plays all tracks in the current
album in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all tracks in random order.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Editing an Album or Playlist
1Editing an Album or Playlist
The maximum number of songs in each of the six
user playlists is 999. Adding new songs overwrites
the oldest songs.
Change the playlist name, album name, genre, and track order of the current
playlist. You can also delete tracks, playlists, and albums.
■ Editing an album
1. Press the MENU button.
The maximum number of original playlists is 999 with
a maximum of 99 songs in each playlist.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
To delete an album:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
Deleting an album (original playlist) also deletes the
album tracks you have stored in any user playlists.
Deleting a user playlist or deleting all tracks from a
user playlist does not remove the playlist folder.
The folder retains the playlist name and artist
information.
TOC
Features
4. To edit an album name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
Each album CD counts as an original playlist. Adding
a track from a user playlist into the same user playlist
will cause the track to appear twice in the playlist.
.
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then
press .
2 Editing Track Information P. 270
Index
Home
Continued
267
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Editing a playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
TOC
Features
4. To edit a playlist name:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen.
To delete a playlist:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
.
To edit track information or delete a track:
Rotate
to select List Tracks, then
press .
2 Editing Track Information P. 270
Index
Home
268
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Creating a new playlist
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Playlists, then
press .
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select Create New Playlist,
then press .
u Enter the name using the interface dial or
the audio with touch screen, then select
tracks from the Music Search list.
Index
Home
Continued
269
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Editing Track Information
Change the track title, artist name, genre and composer. You can also delete tracks.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
TOC
to select Tracks, then press
4. Rotate
to select a track you want to edit
or delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Features
5. To edit track information:
Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
u Enter the track name, track artist, etc.
using the interface dial or the audio with
touch screen. Move , rotate
to
select OK, then press .
To delete a track:
Rotate
to select Delete, then press
Index
Home
270
.
.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Displaying Music Information
Music information (album name, artist name, genre) can be acquired by accessing
the Gracenote® Album Info.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Edit/Delete, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Albums, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Edit name, then
press .
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select an album you want to
edit, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Move to select Get Music Info, then
press .
u The system starts to access the
Gracenote® Album Info.
Index
Home
Continued
271
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Updating Gracenote® Album Info
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote® Media Database) that is included
with the navigation system.
1. Insert the update disc into the disc slot or
connect the USB flash drive that includes
the update.
2. Press the SETTINGS button in the HDD
mode.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
272
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Gracenote Album DB Info Update.
4. Rotate
to select Update from CD or
Update from USB, then press .
u The system starts updating and the
confirmation message appears on the
screen. Press
to finish.
1Updating Gracenote® Album Info
To acquire updated files:
• Consult a dealer.
• U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com.
• Canada: Visit www.hondanavi.ca.
Once you perform an update, any information you
edited before will be overwritten or erased.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
Playing an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Connect the iPod® using your dock connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod® is connected.
Album Art
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Album Art Icon
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
TOC
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Album Bar
Select to search for an album.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.
Move up, down, right and left to
select secondary menu.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous
display.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
Index
Home
Continued
273
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select an Album
1How to Select an Album
You cannot select an album while the vehicle is
moving.
Select X to go back to the previous screen.
Select an album
image.
Select the
album bar.
Album Bar
Album Image
TOC
Features
Index
Home
274
1. Select the album bar.
u The image of the current album is displayed.
2. Select or icon to search for an album.
u When the album image you are looking for appears, select it to play.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
You can control an iPod® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 277
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
Features
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a song from the Music Search list.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
275
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Shuffle/Repeat, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select a mode, then press
TOC
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select Shuffle/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
Index
Home
276
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
.
Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres,
or composers) in random order.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
2013 Accord Sedan
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
QRG
Use SBV to search for and play music from your HDD or iPod® using voice
commands.
1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:
• On (factory default): Song By Voice commands are
■ To enable SBV
available.
• Off: Disable the feature.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice, then
press .
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
277
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Searching for music using SBV
1Searching for music using SBV
1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
HDD and iPod®.
TOC
3. Press the
button and say a command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
Features
4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/back)
button on the steering wheel. The selected
song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.
Index
Home
278
Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By VoiceTM commands P. 247
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the HDD or iPod®.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 279
uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phonetic Modification
1Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the HDD or iPod®.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select HDD or iPod, then
press .
TOC
Features
4. Move and rotate
to select New
Modification, then press .
Index
Home
Continued
279
uuAudio System Basic Operationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
6. Rotate
to select the item to modify
(e.g., Artist), then press .
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
TOC
Features
7. Rotate
to select an entry (e.g., No
Name), then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select Play,
then press .
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, rotate
to select
Delete, then press .
8. Rotate
to select Modify, then
press .
9. Enter the phonetic spelling you wish to
use (e.g., “Artist A”) when prompted.
Index
Home
280
10. Move to select OK to exit.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
U.S. models
1Playing Internet Radio
Compatible phones only
Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is currently available exclusively in the United States.
Playing Internet Radio
Connect a compatible phone through Bluetooth®.
iPhone
You can also connect the phone using your dock connector to the USB port.
Make sure the audio setting is correct for the connection type.
2 USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority * P. 331
Select Source to select Pandora or Aha mode.
Audio/Information Screen
Album Art
Rating Icon
TOC
Features
USB Indicator
Appears when a phone is
connected.
Audio with Touch Screen
Source
Select Pandora® or AhaTM.
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.
Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.
* Not available on all models
Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
Index
Home
Continued
281
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Pandora® Menu
1Playing Internet Radio
You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Skip Forward
• Dislike
• Play/Pause
• Bookmark This Song
• Station List
• Bookmark This Artist
• Like
• Change Source
■ Operating a menu item
TOC
Features
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
To select Change Source, press the MENU
button, then press .
To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
(888) 528-7876.
Pandora® is a personalized Internet radio service that
selects music based on an artist, song, or genre a user
enters, and streams what is likely to be of interest.
To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com. for more information.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system,
it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure
Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected.
1Pandora® Menu
You can control Pandora® using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® P. 292
Index
Home
282
There are restrictions on the number of songs you
can skip or dislike in a given hour.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Internet Radio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ AhaTM Radio Menu
1AhaTM Radio Menu
You can operate some of the AhaTM menu items from your vehicle’s audio system.
The available items are:
• Like
• View text
• Dislike
• View list
• Play/Pause
• Reply
• 15sec Back
• Change Source
• 30sec Skip
• Stations
■ Operating a menu item
To select Change Source or Stations, press
the MENU button, then press .
You can control AhaTM Radio using voice commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 AhaTM Radio P. 294
TOC
Features
The menu items are shown in the lower half of
the audio/information screen.
Rotate
to select an item and press .
AhaTM by Harman is a cloud-based service that
organizes your favorite web content into live radio
stations. You can access podcasts, internet radio,
location-based services, and audio updates from
social media sites.
The menu items vary depending on the station you
selected.
To use this service in your vehicle, the HondaLink app
must be installed on your phone. Visit
owners.honda.com/apps for more information.
You must have a previously set up Aha account prior
to using the service in your vehicle. Visit
www.aharadio.com for more information.
Index
Home
283
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
QRG
Playing a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port P. 175
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
Audio with Touch Screen
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Knob
Turn to adjust the volume.
USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive
is connected.
Source
Select to change an audio source.
Folder Up/Down Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder,
and
to skip to the beginning of
the previous folder.
More
Select to display the menu items.
Index
Home
284
BACK Button
Press to go back to the previous display.
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a file.
Interface Dial/ENTER Button
Press and turn to select an item, then press
to set your selection. Move up, down, right
and left to select secondary menu.
MENU Button
Press to display the menu items.
*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes ® are playable on this unit.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1Playing a USB Flash Drive
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Music Search, then
press .
You can control a USB flash drive using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 295
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) are not played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then
skips to the next file.
Folder Selection
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod®/USB Flash Drive P. 291
Features
3. Rotate
, move
or , then press
to
select a file from the Music Search list.
TOC
File Selection
Index
Home
Continued
285
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Select a Play Mode
1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan or Random/
Repeat, then press .
3. Rotate
TOC
to select a mode, then press
Random/Repeat is selected.
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select Random/Repeat.
3. Select a mode.
Random/Repeat is selected.
■ To turn off a play mode
Interface Dial
Index
Home
286
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select the mode you want to turn off, then press
Audio with Touch Screen
1. Select More.
2. Select the mode you want to turn off.
.
.
Random/Repeat
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder
in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
Playing Bluetooth® Audio
QRG
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth®-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 382
Audio/
Information
Screen
Audio with Touch
Screen
Source
Select to change
an audio source.
VOL (Volume)
Knob
Turn to adjust the
volume.
Folder Up/Down
Icons
Select
or
to
change folders.
Pause Icon
Play Icon
More
Select to display
the menu items.
Interface Dial/
ENTER Button
Press and turn to
select an item,
then press to set
your selection.
Move up, down,
right and left to
select secondary
menu.
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.
You can control Bluetooth® Audio using voice
commands.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 245
TOC
Features
(Power) Button
Press to turn the
audio system on and
off.
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Skip/Seek Icons
Select
or
to change files.
MENU Button
Press to display
the menu items.
Index
Home
Continued
287
uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.
TOC
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
Features
■ To pause or resume a file
Interface Dial
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Rotate
to select Play or Pause, then press
.
Audio with Touch Screen
Select the play icon or pause icon.
■ Switching to HFL
1Switching to HFL
Press the
(pick-up) button on the steering
wheel to receive a call when Bluetooth® Audio
is playing.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 376
Index
Home
288
Press the
(hang-up/back) button to end
the call and return to Bluetooth® Audio.
Button
Button
If you receive a call while Bluetooth® Audio is in the
pause mode, it will resume play after ending the call.
Audio Error Messages
2013 Accord Sedan
CD Player
QRG
If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages.
Error Message
Unplayable File
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Push Eject
Cause
Track/file format not supported
Mechanical error
Solution
●
Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file
plays automatically.
●
Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the
error message is cleared.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the
disc again.
●
2 Protecting CDs P. 297
Mecha Error
●
Servo error
Check Disc
Disc error
Heat Error
High temperature
●
●
TOC
Features
●
Bad Disc
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
If the error message reappears, press the
button, and pull out
the disc.
Insert a different disc.
If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc.
If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed,
contact a dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed.
2 Protecting CDs P. 297
●
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
Index
Home
289
uuAudio Error MessagesuHard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with navigation system
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio
If an error occurs while playing the Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Navigation system is suspended due to low air pressure.
System will resume when vehicle moves to an area of lower
altitude.
HDD access error.
Please consult your dealer.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
290
Solution
The HDD is inoperable due to low atmospheric pressure. Move
your vehicle to a lower altitude where atmospheric pressure is
higher.
—
The navigation system temperature is too high. For
protection, the system will shut off until it cools down.
Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until
the error message is cleared.
The navigation system temperature is too low. For
protection, the system will shut off until it warms up.
The navigation system has difficulty reading the HDD when the
temperature is below approximately -22°F (-30°C). The navigation
system starts up automatically when the display warms up.
Unplayable File
Appears when a file format not supported. Current track will be
skipped. The next supported track plays automatically.
uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod®/USB Flash Drive
2013 Accord Sedan
iPod®/USB Flash Drive
QRG
If an error occurs while playing an iPod® or USB flash drive, you may see the
following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the
USB adapter unit.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s
Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system
off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Unsupported Version
Appears when an unsupported iPod® is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod® is connected,
update the iPod® software to the newer version.
Connect Retry
Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod®. Reconnect the iPod®.
Unplayable File
Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message
appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song.
TOC
Features
USB Error
iPod®
Appears when the iPod® is empty.
USB flash drive
No Data
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash
drive.
iPod® and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported
Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is
connected, reconnect the device.
Index
Home
291
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
U.S. models
Pandora®
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Solution
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do
not reconnect the device that caused the error.
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
There is no station list in the device.
Please add the station list to your device.
Features
Audio with Touch Screen
Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.
No stations have been created.
Please create a station on the device.
The time that was able to be reproduced in one month was
exceeded.
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
predetermined number of times in a month.
Audio/Information Screen
Unfortunately our music licenses force us to limit the number
of songs you may skip each hour.
If you want to hear something else, select another station
Appears when you try to skip a song or select Dislike over the
starting with a different artist or song.
predetermined number of times in an hour.
Audio with Touch Screen
Music licenses force us to limit the number of tracks you may
skip each hour.
Index
Home
292
uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Error Message
Solution
Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later.
No data
Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.
PANDORA ver unsupport
Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.
PANDORA system maintenance
Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.
Cannot connect to PANDORA when stopped. Check your
mobile phone
Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.
TOC
Features
Unable to save rating.
Unable to save bookmark
or
Unable to skip
Index
Home
293
uuAudio Error MessagesuAhaTM Radio
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
U.S. models with the touch screen
TM
Aha
Radio
If an error occurs while playing AhaTM Radio, you may see the following error
messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message
TOC
Features
Index
Home
294
Solution
Cannot connect to HondaLink. When stopped, check your
mobile device.
Appears when the AhaTM app is not activated. Check your device.
Incompatible USB Device
Please Check Owner’s Manual
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect
the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again.
Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.
General Information on the Audio System
2013 Accord Sedan
XM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to XM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in
the display: Turn the selector knob or the interface dial until 0 appears.
2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the XM®
website to subscribe.
■ Receiving XM® Radio
Switch to the XM® mode by pressing the SOURCE button repeatedly or operating
the audio with touch screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the
service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
Loading:
XM® is loading the audio or program information.
Ch off air:
The channel is not currently broadcasting.
Ch unauthorized:
XM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Contact Information for XM® Radio:
US: XM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or
1-800-852-9696
Canada: XM® Canada at www.xmradio.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving XM® Radio
The XM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack
TOC
Features
■ XM® Radio Display Messages
QRG
1Subscribing to XM® Radio
No signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Ch unavailable:
No such channel exists, the channel is not part of your subscription, or the artist or
title information is unavailable.
Index
Check antenna:
There is a problem with the XM® antenna. Contact a dealer.
Home
* Not available on all models
295
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs
QRG
• Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use.
• Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed.
• Play only standard round-shaped CDs.
The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks.
TOC
Also includes:
Features
■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
Index
Home
296
2013 Accord Sedan
Recommended CDs
1Recommended CDs
A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded
under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not
play either.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos:
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks & DTS 2.0 Channel is a
trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software.
©DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
uuGeneral Information on the Audio System uRecommended CDs
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Protecting CDs
Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs:
• Store a CD in its case when it is not being played.
• When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge.
• Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface.
1Protecting CDs
NOTICE
Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside
and damage the audio unit.
Examples:
●
Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and
excessively thick CDs
• Never insert foreign objects into the CD player.
• Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.
Bubbled/
Wrinkled
• Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
With Label/
Sticker
Using
Printer Label
Kit
●
●
Sealed
With Plastic Ring
● Poor quality
Damaged CDs
CDs
Chipped/
Cracked
Small CDs
Warped
TOC
Features
• Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD.
Burrs
3-inch
(8-cm)
CD
Index
Home
297
uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives
QRG
■ iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility
TOC
Model
iPod® (5th generation)
iPod classic® 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic® 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic® 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano® (1st to 6th generation) launch in 2010
iPod touch® (1st to 4th generation) launch in 2010*1
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 3GS/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S*1
iPhone® 3G/iPhone® 4/iPhone® 4S*2
Features
• Use a recommended USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher.
• Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
• Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
• Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
• Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.
Home
298
1iPod® and iPhone® Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.
*1: Models with one display
*2: Models with two display or the navigation system
■ USB Flash Drives
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Compatible iPod®, iPhone®, and USB Flash Drives
1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.
Customized Features
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
1Customized Features
Models without navigation system
■ How to customize
When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Models with one display
to
With the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate
select Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings,
System Settings or Info Settings and press .
Automatic transmission/CVT models
• Shift to (P .
Manual transmission models
• Set the parking brake.
Audio/Information Screen
To customize other features, rotate
, and press
2 List of customizable options P. 313
.
TOC
Features
SETTINGS Button
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
299
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with two displays
With the power mode in ON, press and hold the DISP button. Rotate
to select
Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System
Settings or Info Settings and press .
Audio/Information Screen
TOC
Features
DISP Button
Index
Home
300
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to customize
1Customized Features
Models with navigation system
Models with navigation system
With the power mode in ON, press the SETTINGS button. Rotate
to select
Audio Settings, Phone Settings, Camera Settings, Vehicle Settings, System
Settings, Info Settings, or Navi Settings and press .
Audio/Information Screen
When you customize setting, make sure that the
vehicle is at a complete stop and shift to (P .
To customize other features, rotate
, move
or , and press .
2 List of customizable options P. 323
,
,
TOC
Features
SETTINGS Button
Index
Home
Continued
301
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models without navigation system
■ Customization flow
Brightness
Contrast
Black level
Display
Models with one display
Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays
Press and hold the DISP button.
TOC
Beep
Bluetooth
System
Settings
Voice
Recog
Features
Clock
Other
Default
Index
Home
302
Bluetooth On/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Voice Prompt
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Language
Background Color
Header Clock Display
Factory data reset
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TPMS Calibration
Driver Assist System Setup *
Forward Collision Warning
Distance *
Meter
Setup
Lighting
Setup
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens *
*
Memory Position Link
Driving Position Setup
Keyless
Door Unlock Mode
Access
Setup *
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Door
Setup
Maintenance Info.
Default
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Reset
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
303
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Sound
Source Select Popup
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth Device List
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *
Audio
Settings
Default
TOC
Features
Info
Settings
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Type
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Default
Index
Home
304
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Connect
Phone
Add Bluetooth Device
Disconnect
Bluetooth
Device
List
Phone
Settings
Text
Message*1,
Text/Email*2
TOC
Features
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo*2
Phone
Enable Text Message*1,
Enable Text/Email*2
Select Account *
New Text Message Alert*1,
New Text/Email Alert*2
Message Auto Reading
Default
*1: Models with one display
*2: Models with two displays
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
305
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
LaneWatch *
Camera
Settings
TOC
Features
Index
Rear
Camera
Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Default*1
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Default
Default
*1: Models with two displays
Home
306
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with navigation system
■ Customization flow
Press the SETTINGS button.
Display
System
Settings
Bluetooth
Voice
Recog.
Volume
Interface Dial Feedback
Message Auto Reading
Verbal Reminder
Bluetooth Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
TOC
Features
Default
Sound/
Beep
Brightness
Contrast
Black level
Volume
Voice Prompt
Song by Voice
Song by Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Index
Home
Continued
307
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Clock
Clock/Wallpaper
Type
Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
Others
TOC
Features
Units
Language
Voice Command Tips
Background Color
Header Clock Display
System Device Information
Factory data reset
Index
Home
308
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
TPMS Calibration
Driver
Forward Collision Warning Distance
Assist
ACC Pre-Running Car Detect Beep *
System
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Setup
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep
Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto light Sensitivity
Keyless
Access
Setup
Default
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Language Selection *
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
Meter
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Setup
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Keyless Start Guidance Screens
Driving Position Setup *
Memory Position Link
Lighting
Setup
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Door
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Setup
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Maintenance Info.
Maintenance Reset
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
309
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
LaneWatch
Camera
Settings
Default
Rear
Camera
TOC
Show with Turn Signal
Reference Lines
Next Maneuver Pop up
Display
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Color
Tint
Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Features
Default
Sound
Source Select Setup
HD Radio Mode
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Audio
Settings
Bluetooth Device List
Recording from CD
Recording Quality
HDD Info
Index
Default
Gracenote Album DB Info Update
Update Gracenote Album Info
Delete all HDD Data
Home
310
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Phone
Connect phone
Default
Bluetooth Device
List
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect
Edit Bluetooth
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device
Phone
Settings
Default
TOC
Features
Edit Speed Dial
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
Use Contact Photo
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Text/Email Alert
Text/Email
Default
Index
Home
Continued
311
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Navi
Settings
See Navigation System Manual.
Clock
Info
Settings
TOC
Features
Others
Clock/Wallpaper Type
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Auto Time Zone *
Auto Daylight *
Clock Reset
INFO Screen Preference
Default
Index
Home
312
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ List of customizable options
Models without navigation system
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Display
Selectable Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Selects whether a beeper sounds or not when
you operate the selector knob.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth On/Off
Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.
Beep
Bluetooth
—
2 Phone Setup P. 347
Edit Pairing Code
Voice
Recog
TOC
Features
System
Settings
Description
Voice Prompt
Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 349
Turns the voice prompt on and off.
Random*1/Fixed
Beginner*1/Expert
Index
*1:Default Setting
Home
Continued
313
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Clock Type
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock
TOC
Features
Other
Wallpaper
Index
●
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 183, P 210
Selectable Settings
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone/
Add New
Adjust Clock.
—
2 Setting the Clock P. 106
Clock Format
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.
12H*1/24H
Language
Changes the display language.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen*.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display
Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.
On*1/Off
Factory data reset
Default
Changes the clock display type.
●
Clock Adjustment
System
Settings
Description
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 334
Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.
Yes/No
Yes/No
*1:Default Setting
Home
314
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Description
Selectable Settings
TPMS Calibration
Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.
Cancel*1/Calibrate
Driver
Assist
System
Setup *
Forward Collision Warning
Distance *
Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.
Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turn the ambient meter feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.
On*1/Off
Meter
Setup
Driving
Position
Setup*
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Customizable Features
Index
*1:Default Setting
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
315
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Keyless
Access
Setup *
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Lighting
Setup
Description
Selectable Settings
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Sets the beeper sound or not when you grab
either front door handle.
On*1/Off
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.
60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min
*1:Default Setting
Index
Home
316
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Vehicle
Settings
Maintenance
Info.
Selectable Settings
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P*2/Off
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park*2/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door*1/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.
TOC
Features
Door
Setup
Description
—
Yes/No
Index
*1:Default Setting
*2:Automatic transmission/CVT models
Home
Continued
317
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Description
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
Sound
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 185, P. 212
Selectable Settings
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and SUBW*), Off/Low/
Mid*1/High (SVC)
Models with one display
Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.
Source Select Popup
TOC
Models with two displays
Features
Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on or not when Audio is selected
on the Function Change screen.
Audio
Settings
iPod®, USB, Pandora® or AhaTM mode
Turns on and off the cover art display.
Cover Art
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Device List
iPod®, Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM
mode
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority
Index
Home
318
On/Off*1
Default
On*1/Off
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.
—
Selects the connection to have priority.
Bluetooth/USB*1
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
*
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Info
Settings
Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type
Description
Selectable Settings
Clock Type
Wallpaper
See System Settings on P. 313 to P. 314
Clock Adjustment
Clock Format
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.
TOC
Yes/No
Features
Default
Index
Home
Continued
319
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Connect Phone
Description
Selectable Settings
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
—
2 Phone Setup P. 347
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
—
2 Phone Setup P. 347
TOC
Edit Speed Dial
Features
Phone
Settings
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
Auto Transfer
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Answer
Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off*1
Ring Tone
Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
Use Contact Photo*2
Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.
On*1/Off
Phone
Index
Home
320
*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays
—
2 Speed Dial P. 358
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Text/
Message*2,
Text/
Email*3
Default
Description
Selectable Settings
Enable Text Message*2,
Enable Text/Email*3
Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.
Select Account *
Selects a mail or text message account.
New Text Message Alert*2,
New Text/Email Alert*3
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.
Message Auto Reading
Sets the system to automatically read an
incoming text message/E-mail.
● On- A text message/E-mail is always read
aloud.
● Off- A text message/E-mail is not read aloud.
● Auto- A text message/E-mail is read aloud only
when driving.
On/Off/Auto*1
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
Settings group as default.
Yes/No
On*1/Off
—
On/Off*1
TOC
Features
Phone
Settings
Customizable Features
*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with one display
*3:Models with two displays
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
321
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Show with Turn Signal
Select whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
On*1/Off
Reference Lines
Selects whether the reference lines come on on
the LaneWatch monitor.
On*1/Off
Brightness
LaneWatch *
TOC
Features
Display
Home
322
Black Level
Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.
—
Color
Camera
Settings
Tint
Rear
Camera
Index
Contrast
Default
Default*2
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Yes/No
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.
Yes/No
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Camera Settings group as default.
Yes/No
*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ List of customizable options
Models with navigation system
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Display
Sound/
Beep
Bluetooth
Selectable Settings
Brightness
Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.
—
Contrast
Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.
—
Black Level
Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.
—
Volume
Changes the volume of the audio speakers.
—
Interface Dial Feedback *
Sets if and when the system reads aloud a
selection made using the Interface Dial.
On*1/Off/Auto
Message Auto Reading
Selects whether the system automatically read
out message, does not read, or read out only
when driving.
On*1/Off/Auto
Verbal Reminder *
Turns the verbal reminders on and off.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth
Turns the Bluetooth® on and off.
On*1/Off
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a security PIN.
TOC
Features
System
Settings
Description
—
2 Phone Setup P. 382
Edit Pairing Code
Changes a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 384
Random*1/Fixed
Home
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Index
Continued
323
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Voice
Recog.
TOC
Features
System
Settings
Description
Volume
Changes the volume of the voice prompt.
Voice Prompt
Turns the voice prompt on and off.
Song by Voice
Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.
2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 277
Song by Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for music stored in
the HDD or an iPod®.
Phonebook Phonetic
Modification
Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.
Clock
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type
Clock Adjustment
Index
Home
324
On*1/Off
On*1/Off
—
—
2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 397
Changes the clock display type.
●
●
Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 241
Clock
—
2 Phonetic Modification P. 279
●
Wallpaper
Selectable Settings
Analogue/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone
Adjust Clock.
—
2 Setting the Clock P. 106
Clock Format
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.
12H*1/24H
Auto Time Zone *
Sets the navigation system to automatically
adjust the clock when driving through different
time zones.
On*1/Off
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Sets the navigation system to automatically adjust
the clock (“spring ahead” or “fall back” by one
hour) when a daylight saving time change occurs.
Clock Reset
Resets the settings of all items in the Clock group.
Units *
Changes the distance unit on the navigation map
screen.
miles*1/km
Language
Changes the display language.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Voice Command Tips
Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving. Only
voice commands are available.
On*1/Off
Background Color
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen and the audio with touch screen.
Blue*1/Amber/Red/
Green
Header Clock Display
Selects whether the clock display comes on or not.
On*1/Off
System Device Information
Displays the system/Device information.
Factory data reset
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 335
Cancels /Resets all customized items in the
System Settings group as default.
On*1/Off
—
—
—
Default/OK
Index
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
TOC
Features
Other
Default
Selectable Settings
Auto Daylight *
Clock
System
Settings
Description
Home
Continued
325
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Meter
Setup
Index
Home
326
*1:Default Setting
Selectable Settings
Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.
Cancel*1/Calibrate
Forward Collision Warning
Distance
Changes at which distance FCW alerts, or turns
FCW on and off.
Long/Normal*1/
Short/Off
ACC Pre-Running Car
Detect Beep *
Causes the system to beep when a vehicle ahead
of you gets too close.
On*1/Off
ACC Display Speed Unit *
Changes the speed unit for ACC on the multiinformation display *.
mph*1/km/h
Language Selection *
Changes the displayed language on the multiinformation display *.
English*1/French/
Spanish
Adjust Outside Temp.
Display
Adjust the temperature reading by a few
degrees.
-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)
“Trip A” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A *, and
elapsed time A *.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B *, and
elapsed time B *.
With Refuel/IGN Off/
Manually Reset*1
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.
On*1/Off
Keyless Start Guidance
Screens
Displays the push button start guidance when
conditions are met to change power mode.
On*1/Off
TPMS Calibration
Driver
Assist
System
Setup *
Description
* Not available on all models
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Driving
Position
Setup*
Keyless
Access
Setup
Lighting
Setup
Selectable Settings
Memory Position Link
Changes the driver’s seat position to a stored
setting.
On*1/Off
Door Unlock Mode
Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.
Drivers Door Only*1/
All Doors
Keyless Access Light Flash
Causes some exterior lights to blink when you
unlock/lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Keyless Access Beep
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.
On*1/Off
Interior Light Dimming
Time
Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.
60seconds/
30seconds*1/
15seconds
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver's door.
60seconds/
30seconds/
15seconds*1/
0seconds
Auto Light Sensitivity
Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.
Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min
TOC
Features
Vehicle
Settings
Description
*1:Default Setting
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
327
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Features
Door
Setup
Vehicle
Settings
Maintenance
Info.
Default
Index
*1:Default Setting
Home
328
Selectable Settings
Changes the setting for the automatic locking
feature.
With Vehicle Speed*1/
Shift from P/Off
Auto Door Unlock
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.
All Doors When
Driver’s Door Opens*1/
All Doors When
Shifted to Park/All
Doors When Ignition
Switched Off/Off
Key And Remote Unlock
Mode
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to
unlock on the first push of the remote.
Driver Door*1/All
Doors
Keyless Lock Answer Back
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
On*1/Off
Security Relock Timer
Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.
90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1
Maintenance Reset
Resets the engine oil life display when you have
performed the maintenance service.
Auto Door Lock
TOC
Description
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Vehicle Settings group as default.
—
Default/OK
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Description
Selectable Settings
Show with Turn Signal
Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to the
passenger side.
On*1/Off
Reference Lines
Selects whether the reference lines come on on
the LaneWatch monitor.
On*1/Off
Next Maneuver Pop up
Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts on the LaneWatch
display.
On*1/Off
LaneWatch
TOC
Features
Brightness
Contrast
Camera
Settings
Display
Black Level
Adjusts the LaneWatch display settings.
—
Color
Tint
Rear
Camera
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.
Default/OK
Fixed Guideline
Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on or
not on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Dynamic Guideline
Selects whether the dynamic guidelines come on
or not on the rear camera monitor.
On*1/Off
Default
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera group as default.
Default/OK
Index
Home
*1:Default Setting
Continued
329
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Sound
Source Select Popup
AM/FM mode
TOC
Features
HD Radio Mode
Audio
Settings
CD (MP3/WMA/AAC), iPod®, USB, Pandora®
or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth® Audio, Pandora® or AhaTM mode
Bluetooth Device List
CD mode
Recording from CD
CD mode
Recording Quality
*1:Default Setting
Home
330
Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 243
Selectable Settings
-6 ~ C*1 ~ +6 (Bass,
Treble, Fader, Balance
and SUBW), Off/Low/
Mid*1/High (SVC)
Selects whether the list of selectable audio sources
comes on or not when the AUDIO button is pressed.
On/Off*1
Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analogue waves only.
Auto*1/Analogue
Turns on and off the cover art display.
On*1/Off
Cover Art
Connect Bluetooth Audio Device
Index
Description
Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
—
Edits or deletes a Bluetooth® Audio device paired
to HFL.
—
Selects whether the songs on music CDs are
automatically recorded to the HDD or not.
Auto*1/Manual
Selects the quality of the music files recorded to
the HDD.
Standard*1/High
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
HDD mode
Displays the HDD capacity.
HDD Info
CD or HDD mode
Gracenote Album DB Info Update
CD or HDD mode
Audio
Settings
Description
Update Gracenote Album Info
Selectable Settings
—
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).
Update from USB*1/
Update from CD
Update the Gracenote® Album Info (Gracenote®
Media Database).
Update by USB*1/
Update by CD
TOC
HDD mode
Pandora® or AhaTM mode
USB/Bluetooth Connection Priority *
Default
Connect phone
—
Selects the connection to have priority.
USB*1/Bluetooth
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
Settings group as default.
Default/OK
Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.
Features
Delete all HDD Data
2 Deleting all HDD Data P. 336
—
2 Phone Setup P. 382
Phone
Settings
Phone
Bluetooth Device List
Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone, or creates a security PIN.
—
2 Phone Setup P. 382
Edit Speed Dial
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.
2 Phone Setup P. 382
Index
—
*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models
Home
Continued
331
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Phone
Sets calls to automatically transfer from your
phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
On*1/Off
Auto Answer
Sets whether to automatically answer an
incoming call after about four seconds.
On/Off*1
Ring Tone
Selects the ring tone.
Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1/Off
Automatic Phone Sync
Sets a phonebook data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
On*1/Off
Use Contact Photo
Displays a caller’s picture on an incoming call
screen.
On*1/Off
Enable Text/Email
Turns the text message/E-mail function on and
off.
On*1/Off
Select Account
Selects a mail or text message account.
New Text/Email Alert
Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text message/Email.
Features
Phone
Settings
*1:Default Setting
Index
Home
332
Selectable Settings
Auto Transfer
TOC
Text/
Email
Description
—
On/Off*1
uuCustomized Featuresu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Setup
Group
Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
type
Description
Selectable Settings
Clock
Wallpaper
Clock Adjustment
Clock
Clock Format
See System Settings on P. 323 to P. 325.
Auto Time Zone *
TOC
Features
Auto Daylight *
Info
Settings
Clock Reset
Other
Default
INFO Screen Preference
Selects the top menu when the INFO button is
pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.
Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Info
Settings group as default.
Default/OK
*1:Default Setting
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
333
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models without navigation system
Defaulting All the Settings
1Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
Models with one display
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Other,
then Factory data reset.
u The confirmation message will appear.
3. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
reset the settings.
to
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.
Index
Home
334
uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with navigation system
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Factory data reset,
then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
The following settings will be reset:
• Routing & Guidance: Rerouting, Unverified Area
Routing, Traffic Rerouting, Edit Waypoint Search
Area, Guidance Mode, Street Name Guidance
• Route Preference
TOC
Features
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
again to reset the settings.
u The confirmation message will appear.
Press
to select OK.
QRG
1Defaulting All the Settings
Index
Home
335
uuCustomized FeaturesuDeleting all HDD Data
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with navigation system
Deleting all HDD Data
Reset all the menu and customized settings, and delete all music data on the HDD.
1. Turn on the audio system and select the
HDD mode.
2. Press the SETTINGS button.
3. Rotate
to select Audio Settings, then
press .
TOC
Features
Index
Home
336
4. Rotate
to select Delete all HDD Data,
then press .
u The confirmation message will appear.
5. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three
remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems.
■ Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that comes with your garage door opener to test that
the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety
information, contact the manufacturer.
Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the
way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls., Inc.
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage
door opener, confirm that the opener has an external
entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic
eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it
does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.
TOC
Features
When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s
path.
1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *
Training HomeLink
Red Indicator
If you have not trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase any
previously learned codes. To do this:
• Press and hold the two outside buttons for
about 20 seconds, until the red indicator
blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to
step 1.
• If you are training the second or third
button, go directly to step 1.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
337
uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Training a Button
1Training HomeLink
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the
HomeLink button you want to program.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the button on
the remote transmitter. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED)
blink after 10 secs?
NO
YES
Retraining a Button
If you want to retrain a programmed button for a
new device, you do not have to erase all button
memory. You can replace the existing memory code
using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink.
NO
Standard transmitter
TOC
Features
3. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink
button for about a sec.
Does the device (garage
door opener) work?
YES
YES
a. Press and hold the remote and the HomeLink
button at the same time. Then, while
continuing to hold the HomeLink button,
press and release the button on the remote
every 2 secs.
Does the LED blink within 20 secs?
NO
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.
Training
Complete
Index
HomeLink LED
is on.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink
button again.
The remote-controlled device
should operate.
Training Complete
Home
338
HomeLink indicator blinks for 2 secs,
then remains on.
a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the
“learn” button on the remote-controlled
device (e.g. garage door opener).
b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.
Indicator remains on
for about 25 secs.
Rolling code transmitter
Indicator blinks rapidly for
2 secs, then remains on for
about 23 secs.
2. Continue to hold the HomeLink button and
follow steps 1 - 3 under “Training a Button.”
Erasing Codes
To erase all the codes, press and hold the two outside
buttons until the HomeLink indicator begins to blink
(about 10 to 20 secs). You should erase all codes
before selling the vehicle.
If you have any problems, see the device’s
instructions, visit www.homelink.com, or call
HomeLink at (800) 355-3515.
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models without navigation system
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call
1-888-528 -7876.
Models with one display
To use HFL, the Bluetooth On/Off setting must be
On.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Volume up
Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
Pick-up
Button
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button
PHONE
Button
Selector
Knob
(Pick-up) button: Press to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press
.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
TOC
Features
Microphone
Index
Home
Continued
339
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with two displays
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Volume up
Pick-up
Button
Microphone
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
TOC
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
DISP
Button
Selector
Knob
Talk Button
Features
(Pick-up) button: Press to display the phone menu on half of the screen, or to
answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag, a phonebook
name, or a number.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press
.
To go to the Phone screen:
1. Press the DISP button to switch the display to the Function Change screen.
2. Rotate
Index
Home
340
to select Phone, then press
.
Bluetooth®Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ HFL Status Display
1HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator
Battery Level
Status
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Roam Status
HFL Mode
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Signal Strength
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
TOC
Features
■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Disabled Options
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
Index
Home
341
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
■ Phone Settings screen
Models with one display
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
All models
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
TOC
Features
Connect
Phone*2
Add Bluetooth Device Pair a phone to the system.
(Existing entry list)
Connect a phone to the system.
Disconnect
Bluetooth
Device List
(Existing
entry list)*2
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit PIN
Replace This
Device
Delete This
Device
Add
Bluetooth
Device
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pair a phone to the system.
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Home
342
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Manual
Input
New Entry
Phone
Edit Speed
Dial*1
Import from
Phonebook
Enter a phone number to store as a
speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
Import from
Call History
●
(Existing
entry list)
●
Delete
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Delete All Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number.
Auto Transfer
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone
Sync*1
Use Contact Photo*2
TOC
Features
Delete a previously stored speed dial
number.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
Index
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with two displays
Home
Continued
343
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Text Message
Text/Email*1, *3
*1, *2
Select Account *
New Text Message Alert
New Text/Email Alert*3
Message Auto Reading
TOC
Default
Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.
Enable Text Message*2
Enable Text/Email*3
Select a mail or text message account.
*2
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text message/E-mail.
Sets the system to automatically read an incoming text
message/E-mail.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Features
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Index
*2: Models with one display
*3: Models with two displays
Home
344
* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phone screen
Models with one display
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with two displays
1. Press the DISP button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
Dial*1
Redial*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Dialed
Received
Missed
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
New Entry
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
Call History speed dial number.
Import from
Phonebook
(Existing entry list)
More Speed Dials
TOC
Features
Call
History*1
Speed
Dial*1
.
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
Index
Home
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
345
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Phonebook*1
Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
Text Message*1, *2
Text/Email*1, *3
Select Account * Select a mail or text message account.
Read/Stop
Select a message
and press .
TOC
Features
Message is read
aloud.
Previous Message See the previous message.
Next Message
Reply
Call
Index
System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the next message.
Reply to a received message using one of
six fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
*2: Models with one display
Home
346
*3: Models with two displays
* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 345
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Continued
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
TOC
Features
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 357
Index
Home
347
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Connect Phone, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Add
Bluetooth Device.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
Index
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
Home
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
348
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To change the pairing code setting
Models with one display
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Models with two displays
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
1. Press and hold the DISP button.
All models
Edit Pairing Code
1To change the pairing code setting
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth, then Edit Pairing Code.
,
3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random
then press .
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
Index
Home
Continued
349
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
,
2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
TOC
4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
Features
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Index
Home
350
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
TOC
Features
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
351
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Set Up a Text Message/Email Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
Models with one display
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text Message.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
Models with two displays
2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
All models
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
Index
Home
352
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
Models with one display
1. On the Text Message screen, rotate
to
select New Text Message Alert, then
press .
1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
Models with two displays
1. On the Text/Email screen, rotate
to
select New Text/Email Alert, then
press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
TOC
Features
All models
2. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
■ To set up the auto reading option
1. On the Text Message or the Text/Email
screen, rotate
to select Message Auto
Reading, then press .
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.
2. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
353
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Device List,
then press .
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
4. Rotate
TOC
to select Edit PIN, then press
.
Features
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
Audio/information screen
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Press
to delete. Press OK to enter the
security PIN.
u Audio with touch screen *
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
Audio with touch screen *
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in
step 4.
Index
Home
354
* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press
.
.
TOC
Features
■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press
.
.
Index
Home
Continued
355
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
356
.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is
set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Other
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
Work
Message
setting
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
Pager
Voice
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
TOC
Features
Pref
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Index
Home
Continued
357
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone screen.
Mr.AAA
111AAA####
Mr.BBB
222BBB####
Mr.CCC
333CCC####
Mr.DDD
444DDD####
Mr.EEE
555EEE####
Features
Home
358
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
TOC
Index
2 Phone screen P. 380
Models with one display
Select a method to store
3. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
1Speed Dial
dial number
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
select Edit, then press .
.
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
to
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
Index
Home
Continued
359
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
Index
Home
360
2. Rotate
to select Phone, then press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Making a Call
1Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
Continued
361
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using the imported
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone screen.
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
2 Speed Dial P. 358
2 Phone screen P. 345
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with two displays
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
TOC
Features
3. Rotate
to select a name, then press
u You can also search by letter. Rotate
to select Alphabet Search, then
press .
.
Models with two displays
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering letters.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Index
Home
362
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using a phone number
1To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone screen.
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 341
2 Speed Dial P. 358
2 Phone screen P. 345
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press
.
Models with two displays
3. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
.
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select
, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.
■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 345
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.
Index
Home
Continued
363
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using the call history
Audio/information screen
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 345
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select All, Dialed, Received,
or Missed, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
Index
Home
364
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Audio with touch screen *
You can dial to the last six numbers in the call
history.
1. Select
.
2. Select Call History.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
365
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Audio/information screen
Select More Speed Dials to view another paired
phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call from that
list using the currently connected phone.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 345
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 358
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
2. Rotate
press
TOC
to select Speed Dial, then
Features
Audio with touch screen *
You can dial to the first six numbers in the
speed dial entries ( - ).
1. Select
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
button to
.
Models with one display
To call stored speed dial entries 1-6, press the
corresponding preset buttons from the Phone
screen.
.
2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select 1-6.
u Dialing starts automatically.
Index
Home
366
* Not available on all models
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming Call screen appears.
Press the
button to answer the call.
Press the
button to decline or end the call.
Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
Models with two displays
TOC
Features
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen instead of the
and
buttons.
Index
Home
Continued
367
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call.
Models with two displays
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
Mute Icon
TOC
Models with one display
Pres the MENU button to display the options.
Models with two displays
Features
The available options are shown on the lower
half of the screen.
All models
Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Index
Home
368
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently
received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud
and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and E-mails.
Models with two displays
HFL can also display E-mails.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.
When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time after the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text Message Alert or the
New Text/Email Alert setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 353
TOC
Features
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
3. To discontinue the message read-out,
press .
Index
Home
Continued
369
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with two displays
1Selecting a Mail Account
■ Selecting a Mail Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the Phone Settings screen.
2 Phone Settings screen P. 342
TOC
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Rotate
to select Select Account on the top of the
list, then press .
Message List
2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
Features
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an
E-mail account you want, then press
.
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Index
Home
370
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Displaying Messages
Message List
1Displaying Messages
■ Displaying text messages
The
1. Go to the Phone screen.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
2 Phone screen P. 345
Models with one display
Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
Models with one display
Models with two displays
2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Select account if necessary.
To see the previous or next message, press
on the
text message screen. From the pop-up menu, rotate
to select Previous Message or Next Message,
then press .
TOC
Features
Text Message
2. Rotate
to select Text Message, then
press .
icon appears next to an unread message.
All models
3. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
Index
Home
Continued
371
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Folder List
■ Displaying E-mails
1Displaying E-mails
Models with two displays
Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No Subject.
1. Go to the Phone screen.
2 Phone screen P. 345
2. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Select account if necessary.
3. Rotate
TOC
Message List
Features
Home
372
.
4. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
E-mail
Index
to select a folder, then press
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Using the Stop or Read option
1Using the Stop or Read option
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 371
2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
This option changes to:
• Stop while the text message/E-mail is read out.
Select this option to discontinue the message read
out.
• Read when the system has finished reading out the
text message/E-mail, or after you selected Stop.
Select this option to hear the system read out the
selected message.
3. Rotate
to select Stop or Read, then
press .
TOC
Features
Index
Home
Continued
373
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Reply to a message
1Reply to a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
3. Rotate
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
2 Displaying Messages P. 371
TOC
Features
Index
Home
374
to select Reply, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying text messages P. 371
2. Press
to have the pop-up menu appear
on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select Call, then press
.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
375
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with navigation system
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s navigation system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
To use HFL, the Bluetooth setting must be On.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Volume up
TOC
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call (888)
1-888-528 -7876.
Microphone
Voice control tips
Features
Pick-up
Button
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
Volume down
Hang-up/Back Button
Talk Button
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag, a
phonebook name, or a number. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system's
volume knob or the remote audio controls on the
steering wheel.
PHONE
Button
Interface
Dial
(Pick-up) button: Press to go to the Phone Call screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.
(Talk) button: Press to give HFL voice commands.
Index
Home
376
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Interface dial: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press
, or to select secondary menu.
. Move
,
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ HFL Status Display
1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator
Battery Level
Status
Comes on when your
phone is connected to HFL.
Roam Status
HFL Mode
Signal Strength
Caller’s Name
Caller’s Number
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motors Co., Ltd., is
under license. Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or
inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until
the vehicle is stopped.
Disabled Option
Only previously stored speed dial entries with
voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers
can be called using voice commands while the
vehicle is in motion.
Features
1HFL Status Display
TOC
You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Index
2 Speed Dial P. 394
Home
377
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use HFL.
1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.
■ Phone Settings screen
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.
TOC
Features
(Existing entry list) Connect a phone to the system.
Phone
Connect
phone
Add Bluetooth
Device
Disconnect
Pair a phone to the system.
Disconnect a paired phone from the system.
Edit Device
Name
(Existing
entry list)
Bluetooth
Device List
Delete This
Device
Add Bluetooth
Device
Index
Home
378
Edit PIN
Replace This
Device
Edit the user name of a paired phone.
Create a security PIN for a paired phone.
Replace a previously paired phone with a
new phone.
Delete a previously paired phone.
Pair a phone to the system.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Delete All Delete all the previously stored speed dial numbers.
Import from
Phonebook
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call
history to store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the
phonebook to store as a speed dial number.
Edit
Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
Manual
Input
Edit Speed
Dial
New Entry
Import from
Call History
(Existing
entry list)
●
●
Delete
Auto Answer
Ring Tone
Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the
vehicle.
Set whether to automatically answer an incoming call after about four
seconds.
Select the ring tone.
TOC
Features
Auto Transfer
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.
Automatic Phone Sync Set phonebook data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to
Use Contact Photo
Default
Enable Text/Email
Text/
Email*1
Select Account
HFL.
Display a caller’s picture on an incoming call screen.
Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.
Turn the text message/E-mail function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
New Text/Email Alert Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new
Index
text message/E-mail.
Home
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Continued
379
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phone screen
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button to display the
menu items.
TOC
Dial*1
Enter a phone number to dial.
Features
Phonebook*1 Display the paired phone’s phonebook.
New Entry
Import from
Phonebook
Speed Dial*1
380
Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a
speed dial number.
(Existing entry list)
Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
More Speed Dials
Display another paired phone’s speed dial list.
Index
Home
Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number.
Import from Select a phone number from the call history to store as a
Call History speed dial number.
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Redial*1
Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.
All
Call History*1
Dialed
Received
Missed
Display the last 20 outgoing, incoming and missed calls.
Display the last 20 outgoing calls.
Display the last 20 incoming calls.
Display the last 20 missed calls.
(Read/Stop)
Message is
read aloud.
Text/Email*1
Previous
System reads received message aloud, or stop message
from being read.
See the previous message.
Next
See the next message.
Reply
Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases.
Call
Select
Account
TOC
Features
Select a message
and press .
Make a call to the sender.
Select a mail or text message account.
Index
*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.
Home
Continued
381
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phone Setup
1Phone Setup
■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no
phone paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.
3. Make sure your phone is search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
TOC
Features
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
Index
Home
382
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and returns to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
When pairing is completed, an Automatic Phone
Sync prompt appears. Select On if you want your call
history and phonebook automatically imported to
HFL.
2 Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
setting P. 393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To pair a cell phone (when a phone has
already been paired to the system)
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Connect
Phone, then Add Bluetooth Device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, move
to select Phone Not Found? and
search for Bluetooth devices using your
phone. From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.
5. HFL gives you a pairing code on the audio/
information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Continued
TOC
Features
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth device.
Index
Home
383
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Pairing Code.
3. Rotate
to select Fixed or Random,
then press .
TOC
Features
Index
Home
384
1To change the pairing code setting
The pairing code may be six or four digits depending
on your phone.
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.
For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To replace an already-paired phone
with a new phone
1To replace an already-paired phone with a new phone
The replaced phone will keep the same speed dial
entries, call history, and security PIN information from
the previously paired phone.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a paired phone you
want to replace, then press .
5. HFL enters the pairing process and searches
a new phone.
u Follow the prompts to pair a new phone.
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select Replace This Device,
then press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if pairing is successful.
Index
Home
Continued
385
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .
TOC
4. Rotate
to select Delete This Device,
then press .
Features
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
6. You will receive a notification on the screen
if it is successful.
Index
Home
386
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail Options
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail
function
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
TOC
■ To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Text/Email Alert.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
1To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
Features
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new text message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To set up the auto reading option
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Message
Auto Reading.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Rotate
to select On, Off or Auto, then
press .
TOC
Features
Index
Home
388
1To set up the auto reading option
On: A text message/Email is always read aloud.
Off: A text message/Email is not read aloud.
Auto: A text message/Email is read aloud only when
driving.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Create a Security PIN
1To Create a Security PIN
If the phone is already security PIN protected, you
need to enter the current security PIN before clearing
the PIN or creating a new one.
You can protect each of the six cell phones with a security PIN.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
add a security PIN to, then press .
Audio/information screen
to select Edit PIN, then press
TOC
.
5. Enter a new four-digit number.
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
to select
OK to enter the security PIN.
Features
4. Rotate
u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a number using the
icons.
Audio with touch screen
6. Re-enter the four-digit number.
u The screen returns to the screen in
step 4.
Index
Home
Continued
389
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Editing User Name
Edit the user name of a paired phone as
follows:
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Bluetooth Device List.
3. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
edit, then press .
TOC
Features
Audio/information screen
4. Rotate
to select Edit Device Name,
then press .
5. Enter a new name of the phone.
Audio with touch screen
u Audio/information screen
Rotate
to select, then press .
Move
to delete. Rotate
or move
to select OK then press
to enter the
name.
u Audio with touch screen
You can also enter a name using the
icons.
Index
Home
390
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically
transferred to HFL.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Transfer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press
.
TOC
Features
■ Auto Answer
You can set HFL to automatically answer an incoming call in four seconds.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Auto
Answer.
3. Rotate
to select On, then press
.
Index
Home
Continued
391
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Ring Tone
1Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Ring
Tone.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
392
3. Rotate
to select Fixed, Mobile Phone
or Off, then press .
Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speaker.
Mobile Phone: The ring tone stored in the
connected cell phone sounds from the speaker.
Off: No ring tones sound from the speaker.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is
set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to HFL.
1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax
Home
Car
Mobile
Other
■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync
Work
Message
setting
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
Pager
Voice
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select
Automatic Phone Sync.
3. Rotate
to select On or Off, then
press .
TOC
Features
Pref
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.
Index
Home
Continued
393
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Speed Dial
1Speed Dial
Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
TOC
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select New
Entry.
Features
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the linked cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
Index
Home
394
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
store a voice tag for the speed dial entry.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say “Call” and
the voice tag name.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
select Edit, then press .
1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”
to
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Record, then press .
5. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
Index
Home
Continued
395
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete a voice tag
TOC
Features
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Edit, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Voice Tag, then
press .
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Clear, then press .
5. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial
Index
Home
396
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Edit
Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, rotate
to
select Delete, then press .
4. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By
Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
397
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
5. Rotate
to select New Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Move
or
and rotate
to select a
contact name, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
7. Rotate
to select Modify, then press
.
8. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
398
9. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To modify a voice tag
1Phonebook Phonetic Modification
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
You cannot modify or delete a contact name if it is
edited with a phone other than the phone connected
to HFL.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
add phonetic modification to, then
press .
6. Rotate
to select Modify, then press
TOC
Features
5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to modify, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
.
7. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select OK, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
399
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete a modified voice tag
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then
press .
TOC
Features
5. Rotate
to select a contact name you
want to delete, then press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
6. Rotate
7. Move
press
Index
Home
400
to select Delete, then press
and rotate
.
to select OK, then
.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To delete all modified voice tags
Connect phone
Phone#1
Phone#2
Phone#3
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
2. Rotate
to select System Settings, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification, then press .
Connect phone
5. Move and rotate
then press .
to select Delete All,
TOC
Features
4. Rotate
to select the phone you want to
delete phonetic modification, then
press .
u The contact name list appears.
6. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
Index
Home
Continued
401
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Making a Call
1Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name,
or number can be dialed by voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say “Call” and the voice tag
name, “Call by name” and the phonebook name, or
the phone number.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
TOC
Features
Index
Home
402
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 377
2 Speed Dial P. 394
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
TOC
Features
4. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Move to Search.
u You can use the keyboard on the touch
screen for an alphabetical search.
1To make a call using the imported phonebook
Index
Home
Continued
403
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using a phone number
1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number, phonebook name, or number using
voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 377
2 Speed Dial P. 394
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Dial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
5. Rotate
to select
, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
You can use the keyboard on the audio with touch
screen to input numbers.
Select numbers, then
to start dialing.
.
TOC
Features
■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.
.
1To make a call using redial
Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s history.
Index
Home
404
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To make a call using the call history
1. Press the PHONE button.
1To make a call using the call history
The call history displays the last 20 dialed, received, or
missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.)
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
4. Move
or
to select All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the PHONE button.
Move to select More Speed Dials to view another
paired phone’s speed dial list. You can make a call
from that list using the currently connected phone.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 394
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
TOC
1To make a call using a speed dial entry
Features
5. Rotate
to select a number, then
press .
u Dialing starts automatically.
These icons next to the number indicate the
following:
: Dialed calls.
: Received calls.
: Missed calls.
button to
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry, phonebook name
or number can be dialed by voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
Index
Home
Continued
405
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Receiving a Call
1Receiving a Call
When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
406
Press the
button to answer the call.
Press the
button to decline or end the call.
Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer
it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen instead of the
and
buttons.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Options During a Call
1Options During a Call
Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
The following options are available during a call.
You can select the icons on the audio with touch
screen.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
TOC
Features
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the Phone
Mute Icon
screen.
Rotate
to select the option, then press .
uThe mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.
Index
Home
Continued
407
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
HFL can display newly received text messages and E-mails as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
408
1Receiving a Text Message/E-mail
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text message or E-mail.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text messages and E-mails.
2. Rotate
to select Read to listen to the
message, then press .
u The text message or E-mail is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text
message/E-mail feature. Only use the text message/
E-mail feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.
3. To discontinue the message read-out,
press .
When you receive a text message or E-mail for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Text/Email Alert setting to
On.
2 To turn on or off the text/E-mail notice
P. 387
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Selecting a Mail Account
1Selecting a Mail Account
If a paired phone has text message or mail accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Press the SETTINGS button.
You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.
Move to select Select Account, then press .
2. Rotate
to select Phone Settings, then
press .
u Repeat the procedure to select Select
Account.
3. Rotate
to select Text message or an
E-mail account you want, then press .
TOC
Features
You can only receive notifications from one text
message or mail account at a time.
Index
Home
Continued
409
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Displaying Messages
Message List
1Displaying Messages
■ Displaying text messages
The
1. Press the PHONE button.
If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
u Select account if necessary.
TOC
Features
Index
Home
410
Text Message
4. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.
icon appears next to an unread message.
To see the previous or next message, move
on the text message screen.
or
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Folder List
■ Displaying E-mails
1Displaying E-mails
Received text messages and E-mails may appear in
the message list screen at the same time. In this case,
text messages are titled No subject.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the MENU button.
3. Rotate
to select Text/Email, then
press .
4. Rotate
Message List
to select a folder, then press
.
TOC
Features
5. Rotate
to select a message, then
press .
u The E-mail is displayed. The system
automatically starts reading the message
aloud.
E-mail
Index
Home
Continued
411
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Read or stop reading a message
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 410
2. Press
to stop reading.
Press
again to start reading the message
from the beginning.
TOC
■ Reply to a message
1Reply to a message
Features
1. Go to the text message or E-mail screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 410
2. Move and rotate
then press .
to select Reply,
3. Rotate
to select the reply message, then
press .
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.
Index
Home
412
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No
You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
John 0123456789####
Reply
2 Displaying text messages P. 410
Call
2. Move
press
and rotate
.
to select Call, then
TOC
Features
Index
Home
413
Compass *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
When you set the power mode to ON, the compass self-calibrates, and the compass
display appears.
Compass Calibration
If the compass indicates the wrong direction, or the CAL indicator blinks, you need
to manually calibrate the system.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
TOC
Features
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Calibration, then
press .
1Compass *
Compass operation can be affected under the
following conditions:
• Driving near power lines or stations
• Crossing a bridge
• Passing a large vehicle, or driving near a large
object that can cause a magnetic disturbance
• When accessories such as antennas and roof racks
are mounted by magnets
1Compass Calibration
Calibrate the compass in an open area.
While setting the compass, press the BACK button to
cancel the setting mode and return to the previous
screen.
4. When the display changes to Calibration
Start, press .
5. Drive the vehicle slowly in two circles.
u The compass starts to show a direction
after the calibration. The CAL indicator
goes off.
Index
Home
414
* Not available on all models
uuCompass * uCompass Zone Selection
2013 Accord Sedan
Compass Zone Selection
QRG
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. On the top screen of any audio source,
press and hold
for 5 seconds.
u The display switches to the Compass
Settings screen.
3. Rotate
to select Zone Adjust, then
press .
u The display shows the current zone
number.
4. Rotate
to select the zone number of
your area (See Zone Map), then press .
1Compass Zone Selection
The zone selection is done to compensate the
variation between magnetic north and true north.
If the calibration starts while the audio system is in
use, the display returns to normal after the calibration
is completed.
TOC
Features
Zone Map
1
15
14
2
3
13
12
4
11
5
6
7
Guam Island: Zone 8
8
9
10
Index
Puerto Rico: Zone 11
Home
415
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
416
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.
Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 418
Maximum Load Limit........................ 421
Towing a Trailer
Towing Preparation.......................... 423
Driving Safely with a Trailer .............. 425
Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 426
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 427, 429
Precautions While Driving................. 433
Automatic Transmission/CVT............ 434
Shifting .................... 435, 437, 441, 443
ECON Button ................................... 446
* Not available on all models
Cruise Control * ............................... 447
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) * ....... 450
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * .. 458
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * ..... 462
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC
(Electronic Stability Control), System ...... 465
LaneWatchTM *.......................................... 467
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)... 469
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 471
Braking
Brake System ................................... 473
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 475
Brake Assist System ......................... 476
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 477
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 478
Rearview Camera ............................. 479
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 480
How to Refuel ................................. 481
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy.................. 482
Accessories and Modifications ........ 483
Index
Home
417
Before Driving
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.
■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
418
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 525
• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.
1Exterior Checks
NOTICE
When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal.
Also check under the hood for leftover flammable
materials after you or someone else has performed
maintenance on your vehicle.
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Interior Checks
1Interior Checks
• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 421
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
TOC
Driving
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 116
• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the head restraint, too.
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 148
2 Adjusting the Head Restraints P. 151
• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
Index
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 146
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 145
Home
Continued
419
uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 35
• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 68
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
420
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
2013 Accord Sedan
Maximum Load Limit
QRG
1Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg).
See Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.
Label Example
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
TOC
Driving
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit -
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, and the tongue
load.
2 Specifications P. 570
P. 572
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 570
P. 572
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,4000 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
Continued
Index
Home
421
uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and
trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.
TOC
Load Limits Example
Driving
Example1
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)
Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)
Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)
Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)
Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)
Example2
Index
Home
422
Towing a Trailer
2013 Accord Sedan
Towing Preparation
QRG
■ Towing Load Limits
1Towing Load Limits
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if you carefully observe the load limits, use the proper
equipment, and follow the towing guidelines. Check the load limits before driving.
■ Total trailer weight
Maximum allowable weight of the trailer,
cargo, and everything in or on it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing loads in
excess of this can seriously affect vehicle
handling and performance and can damage
the engine and drivetrain.
Total Load
Tongue Load
Tongue
Load
• To achieve a proper tongue load, start by
loading 60% of the load toward the front
of the trailer and 40% toward the rear.
Readjust the load as needed.
Check the loading of your vehicle and
trailer carefully before starting to drive.
Check if all loads are within limits at a public scale.
If a public scale is not available, add the estimated
weight of your cargo load to the weight of your
trailer (as quoted by the manufacturer), and the
tongue load.
Break-in Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your vehicle's first 600
miles (1,000 km).
TOC
Driving
■ Tongue load
The weight of the tongue with a fully loaded
trailer on the hitch should be approximately
10% of the total trailer weight.
• Excessive tongue load reduces front tire
traction and steering control. Too little
tongue load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.
3 WARNING
Exceeding any load limit or improperly
loading your vehicle and trailer can cause a
crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Never exceed the gross weight ratings.
Gross weight information
2 Vehicle Specifications P. 570
P. 572
Index
Home
Continued
423
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Preparation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Towing Equipment and Accessories
Towing equipment varies by the size of your trailer, how much load you are towing,
and where you are towing.
■ Hitches
The hitch must be of an approved type and properly bolted to the underbody.
■ Safety chains
Always use safety chains when you tow a trailer. Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
■ Trailer brakes
TOC
Driving
There are two common types of trailer brakes: surge and electric. Surge brakes are
common for boat trailers, since the brakes will get wet. If you choose electric brakes,
be sure they are electronically actuated. Do not attempt to attach trailer brakes to
your vehicle's hydraulic system, as it will lower braking effectiveness and create a
potential hazard.
■ Additional towing equipment
Many states and provinces/territories require special outside mirrors when towing a
trailer. Even if mirrors are not required in your locale, you should install special
mirrors if visibility is restricted in any way.
■ Trailer light
Index
Home
424
Trailer lights and equipment must comply with federal, state, province/territory, and
local regulations. Check with your local trailer sales or rental agency for the
requirements in the area where you plan to tow.
1Towing Equipment and Accessories
Make sure that all equipment is properly installed and
maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province/
territory, and local regulations.
Consult your trailer sales or rental agency if any other
items are recommended or required for your towing
situation.
The lighting and wiring of trailers can vary by type
and brand. If a connector is required, it should only
be installed by a qualified technician.
uuTowing a TraileruDriving Safely with a Trailer
2013 Accord Sedan
Driving Safely with a Trailer
QRG
■ Things You Need To Know Before Towing a Trailer
1Driving Safely with a Trailer
• Have the trailer properly serviced and keep it in good condition.
• Make sure that all the weights and load in the vehicle and trailer are within limits.
Parking
In addition to the normal precautions, place wheel
chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
2 Towing Load Limits P. 423
• Securely attach the hitch, safety chains, and other necessary parts to the trailer.
• Securely store all the items in and on the trailer so that they do not shift while
driving.
• Check if the lights and brakes on the trailer are working properly.
• Check the pressures of the trailer tires, including the spare.
■ Towing Speeds and Gears
TOC
Driving
• Drive slower than normal.
• Obey posted speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
• Use the (D position when towing a trailer on level roads.
■ Turning and Braking
• Turn more slowly and with a wider turning arc than normal.
• Allow more time and distance for braking.
Index
• Do not brake or turn suddenly.
Home
Continued
425
uuTowing a TraileruTowing Your Vehicle
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Driving in Hilly Terrain
• Monitor your temperature gauge. If it nears the red (Hot) mark, turn off the
heating and cooling system */climate control system * and reduce speed. Pull to the
side of the road safely to cool down the engine if necessary.
Automatic transmission models
• Shift to the (S position if the transmission shifts frequently.
Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 567
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
426
* Not available on all models
When Driving
2013 Accord Sedan
Models without smart entry system
QRG
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Brake Pedal
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be charged to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
TOC
Driving
Brake Pedal
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and
cooling system */climate control system *, and rear
defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
427
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Starting to Drive
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
TOC
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the brake system indicator has gone off.
Driving
Manual transmission models
428
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 124
2 Parking Brake P. 473
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Home
Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 15
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 10 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 10 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
■ Hill start assist system
Index
1Starting the Engine
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L * when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with smart entry system
QRG
Starting the Engine
1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
Automatic transmission/CVT models
2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .
Clutch Pedal
Manual transmission models
2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.
Brake Pedal
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. If temperatures consistently
below -22°F (-30°C) are expected, the coolant
mixture should be changed to a higher concentration
to prevent freezing. Consult a dealer for details.
TOC
Driving
Brake Pedal
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 124
Index
Home
Continued
429
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
All models
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
1Starting the Engine
Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 552
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
430
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
Manual transmission models
• If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
TOC
Automatic transmission/CVT models
1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. Check that
the parking brake indicator has gone off.
Driving
■ Starting to Drive
2 Parking Brake P. 473
2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.
Index
Home
Continued
431
uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Manual transmission models
Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to (1 when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission (CVT) models
Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Automatic transmission models
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
432
Move the shift lever to (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill,
then release the brake pedal.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.
uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving
2013 Accord Sedan
Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.
QRG
1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE
Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q or
LOCK (0 *1 while driving, the engine will shut down
and all steering and brake power assist functions will
stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as to not damage the engine or powertrain.
Driving
Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
TOC
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Home
433
uuWhen DrivinguAutomatic Transmission/CVT
QRG
Automatic Transmission/CVT
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower gear, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress
the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
434
2013 Accord Sedan
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
Automatic transmission (CVT) models without paddle shifters
QRG
Shifting
1Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for normal driving
TOC
Driving
Release Button
Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
Low
Used to further increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills
●
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Home
Continued
435
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Tachometer’s red zone
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
TOC
Driving
Depress the brake pedal and
press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift
lever release button.
Press the shift lever release
button and shift.
Index
Home
436
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
Automatic transmission (CVT) models with paddle shifters
QRG
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
1Shifting
You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Release Button
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.
TOC
Driving
Drive
Used:
● For normal driving
● When temporarily driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
● When driving in the 7-speed manual
shift mode
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Home
Continued
437
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Tachometer’s red zone
Shift Lever Position Indicator
M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
438
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing
your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed
manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful
when engine braking is needed.
■ When the shift lever is in (D :
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the
number is displayed in the shift indicator.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant
speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off.
You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds.
The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed
temporarily before making a turn.
The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the
speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down,
the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to
a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.
If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s
red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission
shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter
under the following conditions:
Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest
threshold of the higher speed position.
Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest
threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the
tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up
automatically.
When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold
of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts
down automatically.
TOC
Driving
■ When the shift lever is in (S :
To improve fuel economy, the transmission may shift
up to a higher speed than the seventh under certain
circumstances. In this case, the number in the shift
indicator remains as 7.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces
may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back
to the normal D driving mode.
You can only pull away in 1st speed.
Index
When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to
(D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift
indicator go off.
Continued
Home
439
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
(- Paddle Shifter
(Shift down)
17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed
change.
(+ Paddle Shifter
(Shift up)
To change continuously, release the paddle shifter
before pulling it again for the next speed.
Recommended Shift Points
Use this table as a guideline for efficient fuel
economy and effective emission control.
Shift Up
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
440
Downshifting when pulling
the (- paddle shifter
(Changes to lower speed
number)
Upshifting when pulling
the (+ paddle shifter
(Changes to higher speed
number)
Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (76 km/h)
52 mph (84 km/h)
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or
down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its
allowable shifting range.
Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift
down while the indicator is blinking.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
Automatic transmission models
QRG
Shifting
1Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
You cannot change the power mode from ON to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P .
■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse
Used when reversing
The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.
When shifting gears in extremely low temperatures
(-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the
shift is indicated in the display. Always confirm you
are in the correct gear before driving.
Neutral
Used when idling
Drive
Used for normal driving (gears change
between 1st and 6th automatically)
TOC
Driving
Release Button
Drive (S)
● Automatically changing gears between
1st and 5th (5th gear is used only at
high speed)
● Used when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain
● Used to increase engine braking
Index
Home
Continued
441
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Shift Lever Operation
1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Models with information display
Models with multi-information display
Tachometer's red zone
When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
TOC
Driving
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Depress the brake pedal and press the
shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever
release button.
Press the shift lever release button
and shift.
Index
Home
442
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
Manual transmission models
QRG
Shifting
1Shifting
■ Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE
Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”
Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE
Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.
TOC
Driving
There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.
Index
Home
Continued
443
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.
1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
444
Normal Acceleration
17 mph (27 km/h)
29 mph (46 km/h)
37 mph (60 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)
49 mph (79 km/h)
If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer's red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.
uuWhen DrivinguShifting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:
1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .
TOC
Driving
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.
Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.
Index
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Home
445
uuWhen DrivinguECON Button
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
ECON Button
*
The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
TOC
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, heating and cooling system/climate
control system, and cruise control.
Driving
Index
Home
446
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
2013 Accord Sedan
Cruise Control *
QRG
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.
■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:
Automatic transmission/CVT models
■ Shift positions for cruise control:
Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.
Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.
It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
In (D or (S
How to use
Cruise control is ready to use.
the steering wheel.
When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.
While in the ECON mode, it may take relatively more
time to accelerate to maintain the set speed.
TOC
Driving
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.
■ Press the CRUISE button on
3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.
When to use
Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~
1Cruise Control *
Manual transmission models
When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within fives seconds.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
447
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button
On
On
Press and release
On when cruise control begins
TOC
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
Driving
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
Index
Home
448
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
To increase speed
To decrease speed
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
TOC
1To Cancel
■ To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
CRUISE
Button
• Press the CRUISE button.
CANCEL
Button
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal for five seconds or
more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.
* Not available on all models
Driving
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned off
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.
Index
Home
449
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
Maintains a constant vehicle speed and a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead of you without having to keep your foot on the brake pedal or
accelerator.
■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control:
Use ACC only when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25
mph (40 km/h) ~
■ Shift positions for adaptive cruise control:
In (D or (S
The radar sensor is inside the front
grille on the right side.
How to use
Driving
■ Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash.
When to use
TOC
1ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
ACC is on in the multiinformation display.
Adaptive cruise control is
ready to use.
Important Safety Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC.
Inappropriate use of ACC can result in a serious
accident. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary,
and always keep a safe distance between your vehicle
and other vehicles.
The radar sensor for ACC is shared with FCW
(Forward Collision Warning).
2 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) * P. 458
Index
Home
450
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
1ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
–/SET Button
On when adaptive
cruise control
begins
Press and release
When not using adaptive cruise control: Turn off
adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button.
TOC
Driving
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button,
Set Vehicle
Set Vehicle
the set speed is fixed, and adaptive cruise
Distance
Speed
control begins.
uA vehicle icon and distance bars appear
on the multi-information display.
Do not use ACC under these conditions:
• In poor visibility.
• In heavy traffic.
• When you must slow down and speed up
repeatedly.
• On winding roads.
• When you enter a toll gate, interchange, service
area, parking area, etc. In these areas, there is no
vehicle ahead of you, but ACC would still try to
accelerate to your set speed.
• In bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• On a slippery road (for example a road covered
with ice or snow).
• When a spare tire is installed.
• When going down a steep hill where the engine
braking does not work sufficiently.
1To Set the Vehicle Speed
You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the multi-information display
between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
451
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ When in Operation
1When in Operation
The radar sensor monitors the distance between your vehicle and a vehicle ahead of
you. When the sensor detects a change in distance, the system compensates it by
accelerating or braking your vehicle in order to maintain the cruising speed you
previously set.
■ When ACC detects a
■ When the vehicle goes
The beeper sounds once and
the vehicle icon appears on the
multi- information display.
The beeper sounds once
and the vehicle icon on the
multi- information display
becomes a dotted-line
contour.
vehicle within ACC range:
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper
sounds and a message appears on the multiinformation display to alert you.
Beep
out of ACC range:
TOC
Driving
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
distance from the vehicle ahead.
Even if the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is short, FCW may not alert you or ACC
may start accelerating your vehicle under the
following circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than your vehicle.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you is going faster than
your vehicle, gradually distancing.
ACC Range: 328 ft. (100 m)
Index
Home
452
If you do not want to hear a beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
ACC range, you can change the pre-running detect
car beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 97, 299
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ There is no vehicle ahead
1When in Operation
Your vehicle cruises at the set speed.
■ A vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going slower than the set speed
Your vehicle slows down, and maintains the same speed as the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
■ A vehicle ahead is within ACC range and going at a steady speed
Your vehicle follows the vehicle ahead of it, keeping a constant distance, without
going beyond the set speed.
■ A vehicle ahead goes out of range
ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
■ When you depress the accelerator pedal
ACC may momentarily apply brakes or sound a beep
against a vehicle beside you or even a building beside
you if:
• You drive at a sudden curve or on a narrow road.
• You abruptly move the steering wheel.
• You are in an unusual position within your lane.
TOC
Driving
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alerts even if a vehicle is in ACC range.
Limitations
Use the brake pedal to maintain a safe distance with
other vehicles in the following cases. ACC may not
work properly when:
• Vehicles ahead of you are going slower than 13
mph (20 km/h) or vehicles are parked.
• Motorcycles or other small vehicles are ahead of
you.
ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the
system resumes the set speed.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
453
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.
To increase speed
If a vehicle ahead is going at a speed slower than your
increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your
vehicle. This is to maintain the distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.
To decrease speed
TOC
• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
Driving
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about
5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.
Index
Home
454
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Change Vehicle Distance
Distance Button
Press the
range.
(distance) button to change ACC
Each time you press the button, the ACC
range for the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you changes to
short, middle, long and extra long.
The faster you select the set speed, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long
distance becomes. See the following examples for your reference.
When the Set Speed is:
TOC
Vehicle Distance
65 mph (104 km/h)
Short
84 feet
26 meters
102 feet
31 meters
Middle
111 feet
34 meters
139 feet
43 meters
Long
155 feet
48 meters
202 feet
62 meters
Extra
Long
215 feet
66 meters
285 feet
87 meters
Driving
50 mph (80 km/h)
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
455
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Cancel
MAIN
Button
CANCEL
Button
1To Cancel
To cancel adaptive cruise control, do any of
the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
uACC Off appears on the multiinformation display.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled adaptive cruise control, you can resume the
prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the
RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40km/h).
• When the MAIN button is turned off.
1Automatic cancellation
■ Automatic cancellation
TOC
Driving
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when
ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
cancellation:
• The vehicle speed slows down to 22 mph (35 km/h) and below.
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• When the radar sensor inside the front grille gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
Even though adaptive cruise control has been
automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior
set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC
to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
Index
Home
456
• When the ABS or VSA is activated.
• When the VSA indicator comes on.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Press and hold the
1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise Mode, be more cautious about
keeping a safe distance from a vehicle ahead of you.
(distance) button for one second.
Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds,
and then the mode switches to Cruise.
To switch back to ACC, press and hold the
ACC ON
button again for one second.
Cruise
Control ON
TOC
Driving
Distance Button
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
457
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Alerts you when it detects the possibility of your vehicle colliding with the vehicle in
front of yours.
If the system determines a collision is possible, it gives both visual and audible alerts,
including a heads-up warning that flashes on the windshield.
uTake appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes,
etc.).
■ How the system works
The system may give warnings of potential collisions when your vehicle speed is
above 10 mph (15 km/h).
You can set Long, Normal or Short for when warnings start:
LONG
TOC
Important Safety Reminder
FCW cannot detect all objects ahead and may not
detect a given object; accuracy of the system will vary
based on weather, speed and other factors. FCW
does not include a braking function. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can change the Forward Collision Warning
Distance setting or turn the system on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 97
P. 299
For the FCW system to work properly:
Models with multi-information display
• Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
• Never use chemical solvents or polishing
NORMAL
Driving
SHORT
Your Vehicle
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Vehicle Ahead
compounds to clean the sensor cover. Instead,
clean it with water and a mild detergent.
• Do not put anything on the radar sensor cover.
See a dealer if the radar sensor gets damaged or
requires repair.
Models with information display
The camera is shared with Lane Departure Warning
(LDW).
2 LDW Camera P. 463
Index
Home
458
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
1Forward Collision Warning (FCW) *
Models with multi-information display
Models with information display
Radar-based system
The radar sensor is
at the front right,
inside the grille.
*2
Normal: The heads-up warning
lights flash twice at the Normal
distance.
When the Short distance is
reached, the lights flash and the
beeper sounds continuously
until a possible collision is
avoided.
Beep
1How the system works
When the lights flash at any setting:
The BRAKE message appears until a
possible collision is avoided.
The heads-up warning uses a lens located at the front
end of the dashboard.
Do not cover the lens or spill any liquid on it.
TOC
Driving
When your setting is:
Heads-up
Long: The heads-up warning
Warning
lights flash twice at Long
Lights
distance.
When the Short distance is
reached, the lights flash and the
beeper sounds continuously until
a possible collision is avoided.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the FCW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the FCW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the FCW
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Lens
Short: The heads-up warning
lights flash and the beeper
sounds continuously until a
possible collision is avoided.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
459
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Models with information display
Camera-based system
The camera is located
behind the rearview mirror.
Heads-up Warning Lights
Flash twice.
Beep
The beeper sounds and
the FCW indicator
blinks until a possible
collision is avoided.
TOC
Driving
1Automatic shutoff
■ Automatic shutoff
FCW may automatically shut itself off and the FCW indicator comes and stays on when:
Models with information display
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• The windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
Models with multi-information display
Index
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• You drive in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
• The radar sensor cover is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
All models
Home
460
Once the conditions that caused FCW to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g.,
cleaning), the system comes back on.
Models with information display
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut
off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front
of the vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a
reflective sun shade that can concentrate heat on the
camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the FCW system.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguForward Collision Warning (FCW) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ FCW Limitations
FCW may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle, and may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead
of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short.
A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you.
When either your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you accelerates rapidly.
The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, a small vehicle, or a unique vehicle such as a tractor.
When you drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period that
makes it difficult for the sensor/camera to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
When there are pedestrians or animals in front of your vehicle.
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).

When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When streetlights are perceived as the taillight of a vehicle in front of yours.
When driving at night, the vehicle ahead of you is running with either taillight bulb burned out.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.
—
When the radar sensor cover is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside
objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve.
* Not available on all models

TOC
Driving
●
Models with multi- Models with
information display information display

Index

—
Home
461
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Alerts you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally
crossing over left or right side lane markings.
■ How the System Works
If your vehicle is getting too close to detected
left or right side lane markings without a turn
signal activated, LDW will give audible and
visual alerts.
Models with information display
Models with information display
The beeper sounds and the LDW indicator
blinks, letting you know that you need to take
appropriate action.
1Lane Departure Warning (LDW) *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LDW has limitations.
Over-reliance on LDW may result in a collision. It is
always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within
your driving lane.
LDW only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. LDW may not detect all
lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary
based on weather, speed and lane marker condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
TOC
Driving
Models with multi-information display
Models with multi-information display
The beeper sounds and the Lane Departure
message appears on the multi-information
display, letting you know that you need to
take appropriate action.
Index
Home
462
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How the System Activates
1How the System Activates
The system begins to search for lane markings when all the following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between at 40-90 mph (64-145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not pressed.
■ LDW Camera
LDW Camera
The camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.
LDW Button
Indicator
Press the LDW button to turn the system on
and off.
uThe indicator in the button comes on
when the system is on.
Continued
1LDW Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield that could obstruct the LDW camera's
field of vision.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the LDW camera's field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the LDW
camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
TOC
Driving
■ LDW On and Off
LDW may automatically shut off and the LDW
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 79
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera system to shut off,
when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the
vehicle away from the sun. Also, do not use a reflective
sun shade that can concentrate heat on the camera.
If the CAMERA HOT message appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, the defroster mode when
windows are fogged.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the LDW system.
Index
Home
463
uuWhen DrivinguLane Departure Warning (LDW) *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ LDW Limitations
LDW may not activate or may not recognize lanes, and may activate even when
keeping in the middle of a lane under the following conditions.
Condition
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
TOC
●
●
Driving
●
●
●
●
●
When you drive in bad weather (rain, fog, etc.).
A heavy load in the rear or modifications to the suspension tilts your vehicle.
An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
When the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
When the temperature inside the system is high.
A sudden change between light and dark such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
You drive into the sunlight (e.g. at dawn or dusk).
When the windshield is dirty or cloudy.
When you drive in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
When your vehicle is towing a trailer.
When you drive on a wet road surface following another vehicle.
u The camera may perceive the tire tracks in the water as lane lines.
When there is snow or wheel tracks on the side of the road.
When the road has many repaired area or an erased lane line.
When the vehicle is running over painted signs or crosswalk markings.
When you drive in a lane with specific lane markups (e.g., bots-dots).
Index
Home
464
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic
Stability Control), System
VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less
than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces.
It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.
■ VSA® Operation
When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.
QRG
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® indicator comes on and stays on
while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.
TOC
Driving
VSA® System
Indicator
2013 Accord Sedan
Index
Home
Continued
465
uuWhen DrivinguVSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability Control), System
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
This button is on the driver side control panel.
To turn the VSA® system on and off, press and
hold it until you hear a beep.
VSA® will stop and the indicator will come on.
To turn it on again, press the
button until you hear a beep.
TOC
(VSA® OFF)
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
1VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist), aka ESC (Electronic Stability
Control), System
Without VSA®, your vehicle will have normal braking
and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA®
traction and stability enhancement.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the VSA® system is off, the traction control
system is also off. You should only attempt to free
your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to
free it when the VSA® is on.
Driving
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA® and traction control
systems switched off.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on or
blinks, the VSA® system comes on automatically. In
this case, you cannot turn the system off by pressing
the
Index
Home
466
button.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *
2013 Accord Sedan
LaneWatchTM *
QRG
Is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas
displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the
passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas
and allows you to check for vehicle, in addition to your visual check and use of the
passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while
driving.
1 The system activates when you:
Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.
Press the LaneWatch
button.
2
The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.
3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.
Press the LaneWatch
button again.
TOC
Driving
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.
The system deactivates when you:
Pull the turn signal
lever back.
1LaneWatchTM *
The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.
The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen slightly look
different from what they are.
Audio/Information Screen
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
Camera
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
467
uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the
navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display.
1LaneWatchTM *
For a proper LaneWatch use:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of
debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
• Display: Adjusts display settings.
2 Customized Features P. 299
■ Reference Lines
TOC
Driving
3
2
1
Index
Home
468
1Reference Lines
Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.
The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close
to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually
confirm the safety of a lane change before changing
lanes.
The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road condition
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.
* Not available on all models
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
2013 Accord Sedan
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
QRG
Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the multi-information display *.
■ TPMS Calibration
The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.
You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
TOC
Driving
The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 525
2 Checking Tires P. 525
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.
Manual transmission models
• The shift lever is in (N .
Automatic transmission/CVT models
• The shift lever is in (P .
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.
All models
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
1TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Continued
Index
Home
469
uuWhen DrivinguTPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
TPMS
Button
Models with information display
Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
1TPMS Calibration
• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is
installed.
• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-60 mph (48-97 km/h).
• During this period, if the ignition is turned on and
the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you
may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on
briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
Models with multi-information display
TOC
Driving
You can calibrate the system from the customized
features on the multi-information display.
1. Press
/ 4 button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the
/ 4 button and select
Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.
Index
• If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat steps 2-3.
Home
• The calibration process finishes automatically.
470
You can calibrate the system using the audio/
information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 299
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
2013 Accord Sedan
U.S. models
QRG
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated.
TOC
Driving
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Index
Home
Continued
471
uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
TOC
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
Driving
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Index
Home
472
Braking
2013 Accord Sedan
Brake System
QRG
■ Parking Brake
1Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parking.
To apply:
Pull the lever fully up without pressing the
release button.
NOTICE
Release the parking brake fully before driving. The
rear brakes and axle can be damaged if you drive
with the parking brake applied.
If you start driving without fully releasing the parking
brake, a buzzer sounds as a warning, and Release
Parking Brake appears on the multi-information
display *.
Always apply the parking brake when parking.
To release:
1. Pull the lever slightly, and press and hold
the release button.
Driving
2. Lower the lever down all the way, then
release the button.
TOC
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
473
uuBrakinguBrake System
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases
the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency
situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 476
2 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) P. 475
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
474
1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, the brake pads need to be
replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear. With manual transmission use a lower
gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.
uuBrakinguABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
2013 Accord Sedan
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.
NOTICE
The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When tire chains are installed.
TOC
Driving
■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
QRG
1ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
Index
Home
475
uuBrakinguBrake Assist System
QRG
Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.
TOC
Driving
Index
Home
476
2013 Accord Sedan
Parking Your Vehicle
2013 Accord Sedan
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
QRG
1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.
3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
1When Stopped
Manual transmission models
3. Move the shift lever to (R .
4. Turn off the engine.
Always set the parking brake firmly, in particular if you are parked on an incline.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
NOTICE
The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Driving
Raise the wiper arms when snow is expected.
TOC
Index
Home
477
Multi-View Rear Camera
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with two displays/Models with navigation system
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display
automatically changes to the rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .
■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines
Bumper
TOC
Normal View Mode
Camera
Driving
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Top Down View Mode
1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)
Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Index
Home
478
You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display. Press the
selector knob to switch the angle.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
If the last used viewing mode is Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next
time you shift into (R . If Top View was last used, Wide mode is selected.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Rearview Camera
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with one display
QRG
About Your Rearview Camera
1About Your Rearview Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to
(R .
■ Rearview Camera Display Area
Guidelines
Bumper
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
Approx. 79 in (2 m)
Approx. 118 in (3 m)
The rearview camera has a unique lens that makes objects appear closer or further
than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 299
TOC
Driving
Camera
Approx. 20 in (0.5 m)
Approx. 39 in (1 m)
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guideline
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.
Index
Home
479
Refueling
QRG
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.
■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.
TOC
Driving
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.
Index
Home
480
2013 Accord Sedan
Fuel Information
■ Fuel tank capacity: 17.2 US gal (65 liters)
1Fuel Information
NOTICE
We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.
uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel
2013 Accord Sedan
How to Refuel
QRG
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
Push
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Push on the fuel fill door release handle at
the foot of the driver’s seat.
u The fuel fill door opens.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a
release of air, wait until this stops, then turn
the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap.
1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
Cap
5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder.
6. Insert the filler nozzle fully.
u When the tank is full, the fuel nozzle will
click off automatically. This leaves space
in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands
with a change in the temperature.
Holder
7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening
it until you hear it click at least once.
u Shut the fuel fill door by hand.
If the fuel nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Driving
Cap
TOC
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
Index
Home
481
Fuel Economy
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Improving Fuel Economy
Fuel economy depends on several conditions, including driving conditions, your
driving habits, the condition of your vehicle, and loading. Depending on these and
other conditions, you may or may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display */multi-information display *.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
1Improving Fuel Economy
Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven
Gallons of
fuel
Miles per
Gallon
100
Liter
Kilometers
L per 100 km
In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
TOC
Driving
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.
Index
Home
482
* Not available on all models
Accessories and Modifications
2013 Accord Sedan
Accessories
QRG
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
(FCW) *
2 Forward Collision Warning
P. 458
2 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) * P. 462
• Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
side curtain airbags.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
2 Fuses P. 564
• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.
TOC
Driving
Modifications
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.
Do not modify your vehicle or use non-Honda components that can affect its
handling, stability, and reliability.
Overall vehicle performance can be affected. Always make sure all equipment is
properly installed and maintained, and that it meets federal, state, province,
territory, and local regulations.
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
483
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
484
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.
Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 486
Safety When Performing Maintenance..... 487
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance
Service ........................................... 488
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 489
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood..... 497
Opening the Hood ........................... 499
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 501
Oil Check ......................................... 502
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 504
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter ..... 505
* Not available on all models
Engine Coolant ................................ 507
Transmission Fluid............................ 509
Brake/Clutch Fluid............................ 511
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 512
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 513
Checking and Maintaining Wiper
Blades .......................................... 523
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 525
Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 526
Tire Labeling .................................... 526
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).......528
Wear Indicators................................ 530
Tire Service Life................................ 530
Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 531
Tire Rotation.................................... 532
Winter Tires ..................................... 533
Battery............................................... 534
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 535
Heating and Cooling System */Climate
Control System * Maintenance....... 537
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 538
Exterior Care.................................... 540
Index
Home
485
Before Performing Maintenance
QRG
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.) Refer to the separate maintenance booklet for detailed maintenance and
inspection information.
■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.
■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch Fluid P. 511
TOC
2013 Accord Sedan
Inspection and Maintenance
• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 525
Maintenance
• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 513
• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 523
1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display */multiinformation display *.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 491
P. 495
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 581
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.
Index
Home
486
* Not available on all models
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance
2013 Accord Sedan
Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.
■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner's manual.
TOC
Maintenance
■ Vehicle Safety
QRG
1Safety When Performing Maintenance
Index
Home
487
uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
QRG
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
488
2013 Accord Sedan
Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display * or the multi-information display * every time you
turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change the
engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance
services.
Models with information display
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(Select/Reset) knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life appears on the
information display.
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
TOC
Maintenance
The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models
Continued
489
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display
(Select/Reset) knob.
Explanation
Information
The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other due
soon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life
becomes 15 percent.
The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.
The remaining engine oil life has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.
The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.
Maintenance Minder Indicator
Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life becomes
15 percent.
The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached
It goes off when the display is
to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the
switched.
life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
item codes.
possible.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
490
Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Maintenance Service Items
Maintenance
Minder Indicator
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Minder
Message
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
*1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
●
5
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4,*5
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*6,*7
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Automatic transmission (CVT) models
*5: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher transmission
temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the
Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission
fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*6: 6-cylinder models
*7: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under 20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Continued
TOC
Maintenance
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Sub Items
Index
Home
491
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly
pressing the
(Select/Reset) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for ten seconds
or more.
u The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item codes blink.
4. Press the
knob for five seconds or more.
u The displayed maintenance items
disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
492
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 299
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with multi-information display
QRG
To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life
1Displaying the Engine Oil Life
Based on the engine operating conditions, the
remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed
as a percentage.
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press the
(Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears
on the multi-information display.
Maintenance
Item Codes
Remaining
Engine Oil
Life
Button
Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0
TOC
Maintenance
Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0
Index
Home
Continued
493
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information
Display
Maintenance Message
Oil Life Display
Explanation
Information
Maintenance Due Soon
15 %
The remaining engine oil life is 15 to
6 percent. Once you switch the
display by pressing the
(Information) button, this message
will go off.
The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life, and the maintenance
items should be inspected and serviced
soon.
Maintenance Due Now
5%
The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
button to end of its service life, and the
maintenance items should be inspected
switch to another display.
and serviced as soon as possible.
Maintenance Past Due
Negative Distance
TOC
Maintenance
Index
The system message indicator (
Home
494
The remaining engine oil life has
The engine oil life has passed.
passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
distance appears after driving over
10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km
(Canadian models). Press the
button to switch to another
display.
) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator
1Maintenance Service Items
• Independent of the Maintenance Minder
information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Maintenance Minder
Message
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.
Main Item
CODE
A
B
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
*1: If a message Service does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the
engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
CODE
1
2
●
●
●
●
3
4
●
●
●
●
5
●
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump*4
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
TOC
Maintenance
●
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes/service as necessary
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Inspect suspension components
Inspect driveshaft boots
Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA)
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids
Inspect exhaust system#
Inspect fuel lines and connections#
Sub Items
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110 °F, 43 °C), in very low temperatures (under 20 °F, -29 °C), or tow a trailer, replace every 60,000 miles/100,000 km.
Index
Home
Continued
495
uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Resetting the Display
1Resetting the Display
Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Maintenance Item Codes
(Information)
Button
SEL/RESET
Button
Engine Oil Life
1. Set the power mode to ON.
2. Press
button.
TOC
3. Press the
button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET
button until Maintenance Reset appears on the display.
Maintenance
4. Press the SEL/RESET button.
u The oil life reset mode is displayed on the multi-information display.
5. Select Reset with the
button, then press the SEL/RESET button.
u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display
returns to 100%.
To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button.
Index
Home
496
NOTICE
Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance
service results in the system showing incorrect
maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious
mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after
completing the required maintenance service. If
someone other than a dealer performs maintenance
service, reset the engine oil life display yourself.
You can reset the engine oil life display using the
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 299
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
4-cylinder models
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Manual transmission
models
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Clutch Fluid
(Light Gray Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Battery
TOC
Maintenance
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Index
Radiator Cap
Home
Continued
497
uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
6-cylinder models
Engine Oil Fill Cap
Brake Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange Handle)
Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)
Battery
TOC
Engine Coolant
Reservoir
Maintenance
Index
Home
498
Radiator Cap
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
2013 Accord Sedan
Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
QRG
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.
1Opening the Hood
NOTICE
Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.
Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.
3. Push up the hood latch lever in the center
of the hood to release the lock mechanism,
and open the hood.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
TOC
Lever
Grip
Clamp
4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.
Maintenance
4-cylinder models
Support Rod
Index
Home
Continued
499
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
6-cylinder models
4. Lift the hood up most of the way.
u The hydraulic supports will lift it up the
rest of the way and hold it up.
When closing, lower it to approximately 12
inches (30 cm), then press down firmly with
your hands.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
500
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil
2013 Accord Sedan
Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
QRG
1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use a Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.
TOC
Maintenance
Ambient Temperature
■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.
Index
Home
501
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check
the oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange handle).
4-cylinder models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.
6-cylinder models
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
502
1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.
4-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
6-cylinder models
Upper Mark
Lower Mark
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
503
uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
4-cylinder models
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.
Engine Oil Fill Cap
6-cylinder models
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
504
Engine Oil Fill Cap
1Adding Engine Oil
If any oil spills, wipe it up immediately. Spilled oil may
damage the engine compartment components.
NOTICE
Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
2013 Accord Sedan
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
QRG
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display */multi-information display *.
4-cylinder models
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
Washer
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE
You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
Drain Bolt
6-cylinder models
3. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.
TOC
Washer
Maintenance
Drain Bolt
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
505
uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
4-cylinder models
Oil Filter
6-cylinder models
4. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
5. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
6. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil gasket.
7. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
4-cylinder models
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
6-cylinder models
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
506
Oil Filter
29 lbf∙ft (39 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
8. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
4-cylinder models
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
6-cylinder models
4.5 US qt (4.3 L)
9. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
10. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
11. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.
1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
2013 Accord Sedan
Engine Coolant
QRG
1Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the
radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.
■ Reserve Tank
1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
Reserve
Tank
NOTICE
If temperatures consistently below −22°F (−30°C) are
expected, the coolant mixture should be changed to
a higher concentration. Consult a dealer for more
information.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
MAX
Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle's coolant system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
MIN
Maintenance
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
TOC
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Index
Home
Continued
507
uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Radiator
1Radiator
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Radiator Cap
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise and
relieve any pressure in the coolant system.
Do not push the cap down when turning.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base
of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it
fully.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
508
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
2013 Accord Sedan
Transmission Fluid
QRG
4-cylinder models with automatic transmission (CVT)
■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE
Specified fluid: HCF-2
Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle warranty.
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
4-cylinder models with manual transmission
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
1Manual Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
TOC
Maintenance
If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Index
Home
Continued
509
uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
6-cylinder models
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda ATF DW-1 (automatic transmission fluid)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
510
1Automatic Transmission Fluid
NOTICE
Do not mix Honda ATF DW-1 with other
transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than Honda ATF
DW-1 may adversely affect the operation and
durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage
the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to Honda ATF DW-1 is not covered
by Honda's new vehicle warranty.
uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch Fluid
2013 Accord Sedan
Brake/Clutch Fluid
QRG
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.
■ Checking the Brake Fluid
Brake Reservoir
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
MAX
1Brake/Clutch Fluid
NOTICE
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
MIN
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or worn brake pads as
soon as possible.
TOC
■ Checking the Clutch Fluid
1Checking the Clutch Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.
Clutch Reservoir
If the clutch fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect for leaks or an excessively worn
clutch plate as soon as possible.
Maintenance
Manual transmission models
MAX
MIN
Index
Home
511
uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid
QRG
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator comes on.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
512
2013 Accord Sedan
Refilling Window Washer Fluid
1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.
Replacing Light Bulbs
2013 Accord Sedan
Headlight Bulbs
QRG
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
1Headlight Bulbs
High beam headlight: 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
Low beam headlight: LED type *
Low beam headlight: 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) *
NOTICE
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
■ High Beam Headlight
Holding Clip
Driver side
6-cylinder models
1. Unlock the holding clips, then remove the
upper part of the air intake duct and the air
intake tube.
Tube
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk or tow a trailer, have the
aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified
technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Passenger side
All models
1. Remove the engine coolant reservoir.
However, if you see a large amount of water or ice
accumulated inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
TOC
Maintenance
The exterior lights' inside lenses (headlights, brake
lamps, etc.) may fog temporarily after a car wash or
while driving in the rain. This does not impact the
exterior light function.
Holding Clips
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
513
uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Bulb
Coupler
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
1High Beam Headlight
Holding clip
Press down the central pin until it clicks to unlock it.
4. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab
Central pin
Push the central pin back to lock the clip. Then, insert
the clip into the hole and press on the central pin
until it is flat.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
514
Push until
the pin is
flat.
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Low Beam Headlights
1Low Beam Headlights
Models with LED low beam headlights
Models with halogen low beam headlights
1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
Bulb
Coupler
2. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
Low beam headlight bulbs are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
bulbs.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it to the right.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab
Fog Light Bulbs *
1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8)
Screw
The fog lights are halogen bulbs.
When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Maintenance
Driver side
1. Loosen the screw using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
u Be careful not to rotate the screwdriver
more than one or two times to the left.
The screw may drop down.
TOC
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
515
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
2. Insert a flat-tip screwdriver into the tab on
the cover, then pull straight out as indicated
to remove the cover.
Tab
3. Remove the screws using a Phillips-head
screwdriver and carefully pull the fog light
assembly out of the bumper.
TOC
Screws
Maintenance
4. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
5. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
Tab
Bulb
Index
6. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
7. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Coupler
Home
516
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Passenger side
Under Cover
1. Remove the holding clips, then push up the
under cover.
Holding
Clips
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb to the left to remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it to the right.
Bulb
Coupler
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.
Tab
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
517
uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light: 24/2.2 CP (Amber)
1. Turn the steering wheel all the way to the
opposite side from the light being replaced.
Passenger side: Turn the steering wheel
to the left.
Driver side: Turn the steering wheel to the
right.
Holding Clip
Screw
1Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the
central pin to remove the clip.
Central pin
2. Remove the holding clips and screw, and
pull the inner fender back.
3. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
4. Push in the old bulb, rotate to the left until
it unlocks, and remove.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Socket
Insert the clip with the central pin raised, and push
until it is flat.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Push until the
pin is flat.
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Light Bulbs *
Door mirrors have the side turn lights. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light bulbs.
Home
518
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs
Models with LED type parking/daytime running lights
Parking/Daytime Running Light Bulbs
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Parking/daytime running light bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Models with bulb type parking lights
Parking Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Parking Light: 5 W
Turn the steering wheel and pull the inner fender back in the same way as when
replacing the front turn signal/side marker light bulbs.
2 Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Light Bulbs P. 518
1. Turn the socket to the left and remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
2. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Maintenance
Socket
TOC
Index
Home
519
uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Taillight and Rear Turn Signal Light/Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
QRG
Brake/Taillight and Rear Turn Signal Light/Rear Side
Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
2013 Accord Sedan
1Brake/Taillight and Rear Turn Signal Light/Rear Side Marker
Light Bulbs
Models with LED type brake/taillight
Models with LED type brake/taillight
Brake/Taillight: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Brake/taillight and rear side marker light bulbs are
LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light bulbs.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver,
then lift and remove the clip.
Models with bulb type brake/taillight
Brake/Taillight/Rear Side Marker Light: 21/5 W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
Holding Clip
Clip
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
520
Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until
it is flat.
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Bulb
Socket
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Push until the
pin is flat.
Bulb *
Socket *
* Not available on all models
uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
2013 Accord Sedan
Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
QRG
1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
Models with LED type taillight
Back-Up Light: 16 W
Taillight bulbs are LED type. Have an authorized
Honda dealer inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Models with LED type taillight
Taillight: LED
Models with bulb type taillight
Taillight: 3 CP
1. Remove the holding clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, then pull the lining back.
2 Brake/Taillight and Rear Turn Signal
Light/Rear Side Marker Light Bulbs
P. 520
Holding Clip
Bulb *
Bulb
2. Turn the socket to the left and remove it.
Maintenance
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
TOC
Socket *
Socket
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
521
uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs
QRG
Rear License Plate Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Rear License Plate Light: 5 W
1. Remove the license plate light assembly by
pushing the left edge of the lens toward the
right and pulling the assembly out.
2. Remove the lens by pushing the tabs.
Tab
TOC
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Maintenance
Lens
High-Mount Brake Light Bulbs
High-mount brake light bulbs are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light bulbs.
Index
Home
522
2013 Accord Sedan
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
2013 Accord Sedan
Checking Wiper Blades
QRG
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the metal wiper
arm may scratch the window glass.
Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber
1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the
passenger side.
Tab
NOTICE
Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the
windshield.
2. Press and hold the tab, then slide the blade
from the wiper arm.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
Continued
523
uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
3. Slide the wiper blade out from its holder by
pulling the tabbed end out.
Blade
Top
Retainer
Blade
4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade
that has been removed, and mount to a
new rubber blade.
u Correctly align the rubber protrusion and
the retainer grooves.
TOC
Maintenance
5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder
from the bottom end.
u The tab on the holder should fit in the
indent of the wiper blade.
Indent
6. Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm,
then push down the lock tab.
Tab
Index
Home
524
7. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first,
then the driver side.
Checking and Maintaining Tires
2013 Accord Sedan
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort.
Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems.
Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 469
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
TOC
Maintenance
■ Inspection guidelines
QRG
1Checking Tires
Index
2 Wear Indicators P. 530
• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.
Home
525
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
QRG
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example
Tire Labeling
Example
The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.
Maintenance
Maximum
Tire Load
Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size
■ Tire Sizes
Home
526
1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.
1Tire Sizes
Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)
TOC
Index
2013 Accord Sedan
Tire and Loading Information Label
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.
Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
215/55R17 94V
215: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
17: Rim diameter in inches.
94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
■ Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.
TOC
Maintenance
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Index
Home
527
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are
also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to
Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains
these gradings.
■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread
houlder and maximum section width.
■ Treadwear
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
528
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphat and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
■ Temperature
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
abased on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
TOC
Maintenance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heate when
te sted under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
1Traction
Index
Home
529
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark
The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.
1Checking Tires
6-cylinder models
High speed driving
We recommend that you do not drive faster than the
posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you drive
at sustained high speeds (over 99 mph or 160 km/h),
adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below to
avoid excessive heat build up and sudden tire failure.
Tire Size
Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
530
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.
Pressure
215/55R17 94V
235/45R18 94V*1
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2)
*1: Canadian V6 Touring models
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement
2013 Accord Sedan
Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause the ABS and VSA® (vehicle stability assist)
system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
QRG
1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
531
uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display */
multi-information display * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
■ Tires without rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.
FRONT
Direction Mark
■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.
TOC
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 469
Maintenance
Front
Index
Home
532
* Not available on all models
uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires
2013 Accord Sedan
Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire
chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.
For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Models with 205/65R16 tires
Models with 215/55R17 tires
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036
Models with 235/45R18 tires
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1040
• Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE
Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.
TOC
Maintenance
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
QRG
1Winter Tires
Index
Home
533
Battery
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Checking the Battery
Check the battery condition monthly. Look at
the test indicator window and check the
terminals for corrosion.
Test Indicator Window
The battery condition is being monitored by
the sensor on the negative terminal. If there is
a problem with the sensor, the warning
message on the information display */multiinformation display * will let you know. Have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 177
• The clock resets.
TOC
2 Setting the Clock P. 106
Maintenance
• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the navigation system manual
Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.
Index
WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.
The test indicator's color information is on the
battery.
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry
the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help
prevent future corrosion.
Home
534
* Not available on all models
Remote Transmitter Care
2013 Accord Sedan
Replacing the Button Battery
QRG
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.
NOTICE
■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw
1Replacing the Button Battery
An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.
Battery
3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
Continued
535
uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.
Battery
TOC
2. Remove the upper half by carefully prying
on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
Maintenance
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Index
Home
536
* Not available on all models
Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
2013 Accord Sedan
Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust
and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The
Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
QRG
1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */
climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and
the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
537
Cleaning
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle.
Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if
liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches.
Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or a fire
inside the vehicle.
Opening
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
538
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.
After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
off using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.
uuCleaninguInterior Care
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Floor Mats
Unlock
Lock
1Floor Mats
The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.
If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.
Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.
■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *
Vacuum dirt and dust from the leather frequently. Pay close attention to the pleats
and seams. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a 90% water and
10% neutral soap solution. Then buff it with a clean, dry cloth. Remove any dust or
dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
TOC
Maintenance
Index
Home
* Not available on all models
539
uuCleaninguExterior Care
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive.
Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a
painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.
■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents or engine
compartment. It can cause a malfunction.
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
■ Using an Automated Car Wash
TOC
Fold in the door mirrors. Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the
automated car wash.
Maintenance
■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. Do not spray water into the engine compartment.
Index
Home
540
Air Intake Vents
uuCleaninguExterior Care
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.
■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.
■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. Use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away promptly.
Be careful not to use harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or
a stiff brush. They can damage the clear coat of the aluminum alloy wheels that
helps keep the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTICE
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe up
spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.
1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
TOC
Maintenance
■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels
1Applying Wax
Index
Home
541
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
542
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.
Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 544
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 545
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 551
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery
is Weak....................................... 552
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 553
Jump Starting.................................... 554
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 557
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 558
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On ................................. 560
If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On ...................................... 560
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks ........................ 561
If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On.................................. 562
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On.. 562
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 563
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 564
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 566
Emergency Towing........................... 567
Index
Home
543
Tools
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools were stored in the trunk.
Jack
Tool Case
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
544
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle
Jack Handle Bar
If a Tire Goes Flat
2013 Accord Sedan
Changing a Flat Tire
QRG
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface and apply the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
1Changing a Flat Tire
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.
The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model.
2. Move the shift lever to (P .
Do not use another type of compact spare tire or
wheel with your vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to (R .
All models
3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.
Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.
Handling the Unexpected
Do not use them with another vehicle.
Manual transmission models
TOC
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
545
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
Tool Case
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.
Spare Tire
TOC
4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.
Index
Home
546
The tire to be replaced.
Wheel
Blocks
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.
Handling the Unexpected
6. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
547
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ How to Set Up the Jack
1How to Set Up the Jack
1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Turn the end bracket (as shown in the
image) clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
TOC
Index
Home
548
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.
Jack
Handle
Bar
Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle
Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely.
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Replacing the Flat Tire
1Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)
Handling the Unexpected
2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
549
uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Storing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the center cap.
Spacer
Cone
Wing
Bolt
For
compact
spare tire
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
1Storing the Flat Tire
For
full-size
tire
3 WARNING
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.
■ TPMS and the Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low
appears on the multi-information display *, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 469
Index
Home
550
* Not available on all models
Engine Does Not Start
2013 Accord Sedan
Checking the Engine
QRG
If the engine does not start, check the starter.
1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 554
Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.
Checklist
Models with multi-information display
Check for a message on the multi-information display.
● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 552
uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 Battery P. 534
●
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 564
The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.
Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 427
Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
Handling the Unexpected
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 132
Check brightness of the interior light.
Turn on interior lights and check brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
TOC
2 Immobilizer System P. 124
Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 89
Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 566
Index
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 567
Home
551
uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with smart entry system
If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the indicator on the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes,
and the engine won’t start.
Models with multi-information display
The To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multiinformation display.
All models
Start the engine as follows.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
552
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the indicator on the
ENGINE START/STOP button is flashing.
The buttons on the smart entry remote
should be facing you.
u The indicator flashes for about 30
seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal (automatic
transmission) or clutch pedal (manual
transmission) and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button within 10 seconds
after the beeper sounds and the indicator
stays on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.
uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop
2013 Accord Sedan
Models with smart entry system
QRG
Emergency Engine Stop
If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button, do
either of the following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button two times.
The steering wheel will not lock.
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Manual transmission models
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.
Handling the Unexpected
The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF with the shift lever in (P , and to
ACCESSORY with the shift lever in any position other than (P .
TOC
Index
Home
553
Jump Starting
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Jump Starting Procedure
1Jump Starting
Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
4-cylinder models
vehicle's battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
554
Booster Battery
6-cylinder models
Booster Battery
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.
uuJump Startingu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
4-cylinder models
4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown.
Do not connect this jumper cable to any
other part.
1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6-cylinder models
Handling the Unexpected
6. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
555
uuJump Startingu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
556
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.
Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.
Shift Lever Does Not Move
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Automatic transmission/CVT models
Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.
■ Releasing the Lock
1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Cover
Models with smart entry system
2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
All models
3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock
release slot as shown in the image, and
remove the cover.
4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
Shift Lock
Release Slot
Release Button
5. While pushing the key down, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.
Handling the Unexpected
Slot
TOC
Index
Home
557
Overheating
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
1How to Handle Overheating
• The temperature gauge needle is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
558
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE
Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
needle at the H mark may damage the engine.
uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Next thing to do
1How to Handle Overheating
Reserve Tank
MAX
MIN
1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge needle comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
■ Last thing to do
Removing the radiator cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.
Handling the Unexpected
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark.
u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank,
check that the radiator is cool. Cover the
radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open
the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to
the base of the filler neck, and put the
cap back on.
3 WARNING
TOC
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge needle has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.
Index
Home
559
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about one minute.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The light goes out: Start driving again.
u The light does not go out within 10 seconds: Stop the engine and
contact a dealer for repairs immediately.
If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating and cooling system * /climate control system *, rear
defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer
for repairs.
Index
Home
560
* Not available on all models
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
2013 Accord Sedan
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp Come On or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
■ Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message
■ The message appears on when:
An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being
loose or not being installed.
■ What to do when the message appears:
1. Stop the engine.
2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed.
u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once.
1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.
Handling the Unexpected
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
ten minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.
QRG
TOC
3. Drive for several days of normal driving.
u The message should go off.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
Malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of
gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described
above.
Index
Home
561
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
QRG
U.S.
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
Canada
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Press the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
Handling the Unexpected
TOC
Index
Home
562
2013 Accord Sedan
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On
Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
1If the EPS System Indicator Comes On
NOTICE
If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the system
heats up. The system goes into a protective mode,
and limits its performance. The steering wheel
becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the
system cools down, EPS is restored. Repeated
operation under these conditions can eventually
damage the system.
uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
2013 Accord Sedan
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes on or Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink
A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
QRG
1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE
Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
uCalibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.
Handling the Unexpected
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
uCalibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
TOC
Index
Home
563
Fuses
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push
the tabs to open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.
Handling the Unexpected
564
IG Main 2*4
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
Home
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
IG Main 1
TOC
Index
3
Circuit Protected
−
−
−
−
Front Fog Light *
Horn
Stop Light
FI Sub
DRL
IG Coil
Injector*2
Hazard
Fuse Box Main 2
Fuse Box Option 2
2
Circuit Protected
Battery
EPS
Fuse Box Main 1
Fuse Box Option 1
−
−
ABS/VSA FSR
ABS/VSA Motor
Amps
125 A
70 A
(60 A)
(40 A)
−
−
40 A
30 A
12
Sub Fan Motor
Headlight Low Beam Main
Fuse Box
Wiper Motor
Main Fan Motor
Starter Motor*4
13
Rear Defogger
14
Heater Motor
15
FI Main
Amps
−
−
−
−
(15 A)
10 A
10 A
15 A
(7.5 A)
15 A
20 A
15 A
60 A
(40 A)
50 A
30 A*4
30 A
20 A*2
30 A*3
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Circuit Protected
Heated Door Mirror *
MG Clutch
DBW
Small Light
Interior Light
Back Up
Audio
Fan Timer
24 Right Headlight Low Beam
25
Left Headlight Low Beam
26
−
Amps
(10 A)
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A*5
10 A
15 A*5
−
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:4-cylinder models
*3:6-cylinder models
*4:Models with smart entry system
*5:Models with LED low beam headlights
* Not available on all models
uuFusesuFuse Locations
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Interior Fuse Box
10
11
12
13
Located under the dashboard.
14
15
Fuse Label
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.
■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Circuit Protected
A/C
DRL
−
−
Meter
SRS
Option *
MISS SOL
Fuel Pump
* Not available on all models
Amps
7.5 A
7.5 A
−
−
7.5 A
7.5 A
(7.5 A)
10 A
20 A
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Amps
7.5 A
−
7.5 A
15 A
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
−
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
15 A
(10 A)
20 A
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Circuit Protected
Amps
Front Passenger’s Power
20 A
Window
Rear Driver Side Power
20 A
Window
Rear Passenger Side Power
20 A
Window
*
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
(20 A)
ACCESSORY
7.5 A
−
−
Left Headlight High Beam
10 A
Accessory Power Socket
20 A
(Console Panel)
Driver Side Rear Door Lock
10 A
Door Lock
20 A
Audio *
(7.5 A)
ACM *
(20 A)
Rear Seat Heaters *
(15 A)
Premium Amp *
(20 A)
−
−
−
−
Passenger’s Power Seat
(20 A)
Reclining *
Passenger’s Power Seat
(20 A)
Sliding *
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
16
17
18
Circuit Protected
ABS/VSA
−
Front Wiper
ACG
Rear Accessory Power Socket
(Console Compartment)
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining *
Moonroof *
Front Seat Heaters *
−
Passenger Side Door
Unlock
Driver Side Rear Door
Unlock
Driver’s Door Lock
Passenger Side Door Lock
Driver’s Door Unlock
SRS
Illumination
Key Lock
Parking Lights
Lumbar Support *
Right Headlight High Beam
Washer
SMART *
Driver’s Power Window
TOC
Index
Home
565
uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses
QRG
Blown Fuse
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
Combined
Fuse
Handling the Unexpected
Fuse Puller
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.
TOC
Index
Home
566
2013 Accord Sedan
Inspecting and Changing Fuses
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified
amperage.
Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on
P. 564 to 565.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.
Emergency Towing
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.
■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.
1Emergency Towing
NOTICE
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE
Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.
Handling the Unexpected
Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.
TOC
Index
Home
567
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
568
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.
Specifications .................................... 570
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...... 574
Engine Number and Transmission
Number...................................... 574
Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 577
Warranty Coverages ........................ 579
Authorized Manuals......................... 581
Customer Service Information......... 582
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 575
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 576
Index
Home
569
Specifications
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Engine Specifications
4-cylinder models
■ Vehicle Specifications
Displacement
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Honda Accord Sedan
Spark Plugs
2
3
5
■ Fuel
U.S.: 4,200 lbs (1,905 kg)*1
4,321 lbs (1,960 kg)*2
Canada: 1,930 kg*1
1,980 kg*2
■ Battery
U.S.: 2,249 lbs (1,020 kg)*1
2,315 lbs (1,050 kg)*2
Canada: 1,030 kg*1
1,065 kg*2
■ Washer Fluid
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Information
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
U.S.: 2,006 lbs (910 kg)*1
2,050 lbs (930 kg)*2
Canada: 910 kg*1
930 kg*2
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8
Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
144 cu-in (2,356 cm3)
NGK
DILKAR7G11GS
DENSO
DXE22HQR-D11S
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
Capacity/Type
36AH(5)/45AH(20)
38AH(5)/47AH(20)
52AH(5)/65AH(20)*3
*3: Canadian models
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
55W (H11)
LED *
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights *
35W (H8)
Parking Lights *
5W
Parking/Daytime Running Lights * LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 24/2.2CP (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors) *
Brake/Taillights/Rear Side Marker
21/5W
Lights *
*
Brake/Taillights
LED
Rear Side Marker Lights *
LED
3CP
Taillights
LED *
Back-Up Lights
16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights
21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
LED
Rear License Plate Lights
5W
Trunk Light
5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights
8W
Ceiling Light
8W
Vanity Mirror Lights * 1.4W
Courtesy Lights *
2CP
Headlights (Low Beam)
*1: LX models
*2: Except LX models
TOC
Index
Home
570
* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Brake/Clutch Fluid
Specified
■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■ Automatic Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified
Capacity
HCF-2
Change
3.7 US qt (3.5 ℓ)
Recommended
Capacity
■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 ℓ)
■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.4 US qt (4.2 ℓ)
filter
Size
Regular
Specified
Ratio
Capacity
Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.65 US gal (6.25 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
■ Engine Coolant
Rear
Compact
Spare
Wheel Size
205/65R16 95H*1
215/55R17 94V*2
235/45R18 94V*3
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare
33 (230 [2.3])*1
33 (225 [2.3])*2, *3
32 (220 [2.2])*1, *3
33 (225 [2.3])*2
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
16 x 7J*1
17 x 7 1/2J*2
18 x 8J*3
16 x 4T
*1: U.S. LX models
*2: U.S. EX, EX-L models and Canadian LX, EX, EX-L models
*3: U.S. Sport models and Canadian Sport, Touring models
Information
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
571
uuSpecificationsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Engine Specifications
6-cylinder models
■ Vehicle Specifications
Displacement
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Honda Accord Sedan
Spark Plugs
2
3
5
■ Fuel
U.S.: 4,542 lbs (2,060 kg)
Canada: 2,060 kg
■ Battery
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)
Air Conditioning:
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
U.S.: 2,491 lbs (1,130 kg)
Canada: 1,130 kg
U.S.: 2,072 lbs (940 kg)
Canada: 940 kg
HFC-134a (R-134a)
15.0 – 16.8 oz (425 – 475 g)
ND-OIL 8
Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity
212 cu-in (3,471 cm3)
NGK
ILZKR7B11
DENSO
SXU22HCR11
Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
17.2 US gal (65 ℓ)
Capacity/Type
60AH(5)/72AH(20)
■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity
U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 ℓ)
Canada: 5.12 US qt (4.85 ℓ)
■ Light Bulbs
Information
55W (H11)
LED *
Headlights (High Beam)
60W (HB3)
Fog Lights
35W (H8)
Parking Lights *
5W
Parking/Daytime Running Lights * LED
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights 24/2.2CP (Amber)
Side Turn Signal Lights
LED
(on Door Mirrors)
Brake/Taillights
LED
Rear Side Marker Lights
LED
Taillights
LED
Back-Up Lights
16W
Rear Turn Signal Lights
21W (Amber)
High-Mount Brake Light
LED
Rear License Plate Lights
5W
Trunk Light
5W
Interior Lights
Map Lights
8W
Ceiling Light
8W
Vanity Mirror Lights 1.4W
Courtesy Lights
2CP
Headlights (Low Beam)
TOC
Index
Home
572
* Not available on all models
uuSpecificationsu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Brake Fluid
Specified
■ Engine Oil
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
■ Automatic Transmission Fluid
Specified
Capacity
Honda ATF DW-1
(automatic transmission fluid)
Change
3.3 US qt (3.1 ℓ)
Recommended
Capacity
■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 ℓ)
Change
including
4.5 US qt (4.3 ℓ)
filter
Regular
Capacity
Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.7 US gal (6.5 ℓ)
(change including the remaining
0.17 US gal (0.64 ℓ) in the reserve tank)
215/55R17 94V*1
235/45R18 94V*2
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Front
33 (225 [2.3])
Rear
■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Size
Compact
Spare
Wheel Size
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare
33 (225 [2.3])*1
32 (220 [2.2])*2
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7 1/2J*1
18 x 8J*2
16 x 4T
*1: U.S. models and Canadian EX-L V6 models
*2: Canadian V6 Touring models
Information
TOC
Index
Home
573
Identification Numbers
QRG
2013 Accord Sedan
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. See the
image below for the VIN locations.
1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.
Engine Number and Transmission Number
See the image below for the locations of your vehicle's engine number and
transmission number.
Vehicle Identification Number
Cover
4-cylinder models
Engine Number
Automatic Transmission
(CVT) Number
Information
Manual Transmission
Number
Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
6-cylinder models
TOC
Engine Number
Index
Home
574
Automatic Transmission
Number
Devices that Emit Radio Waves
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System
Remote Transmitter
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-Gen/210/310. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Information
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
TOC
Index
Home
575
Reporting Safety Defects
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov
;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain othe r information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Information
TOC
Index
Home
576
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may .call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on
reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
Emissions Testing
2013 Accord Sedan
Testing of Readiness Codes
QRG
Your vehicle uses “readiness codes,” as part of its onboard self diagnostic system.
Some states refer to these codes during testing to see if your vehicle's emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read if you go through the testing just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.
1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:
1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (automatic transmission/CVT) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
3 minutes.
Information
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
TOC
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.
Index
Home
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued
577
uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (automatic/CVT) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise control. When traffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds
because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
Information
TOC
Index
Home
578
Warranty Coverages
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered for
rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.
Information
Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
579
uuWarranty Coveragesu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2013 Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2013 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
Information
TOC
Index
Home
580
Authorized Manuals
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Service Express
1Authorized Manuals
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners:
The publications listed below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can
order a manual by phone at (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at
www.helminc.com.
For Canadian Owners:
Si vous avez besoin d'un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre concessionnaire
de commander le numéro de pièce 33T2AC00
Make an inquiry to Helm Inc. at (800) 782-4356 if you are interested in ordering
other models' or other years' manuals.
Publication
Form Number
31T2A600
31T2A800
31T2AM00
31T2AA00
31T2AC00
31T2AD00
HON-R
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Owner’s Manual
2013 Honda Accord Navigation System Manual
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Service History
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Technology Reference Guide
(LX/Sport./EX)
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Technology Reference Guide (EX-L)
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Technology Reference Guide
(EX-L with Navigation)
2013 Honda Accord Sedan Technology Reference Guide
(Touring Elite)
Order Form for Previous YearsIndicate Year and Model Desired
Information
31T2AB00
Form Description
TOC
Index
Home
581
Customer Service Information
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals.
They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that
your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the
dealership's service manager or general manager. If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership's management, contact Honda Customer Services.
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Information
TOC
Index
Home
582
In Puerto Rico and the
U.S. Virgin Islands:
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7546
Canadian Owners:
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com
1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
P. 574
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you
uuCustomer Service Informationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
■ Gracenote Music Recognition
Service (CDDB)
■ Gracenote® END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
This application or device contains software
from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,
California (“Gracenote”). The software
from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to
perform disc and/or file identification and
obtain music- related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data
only by means of the intended End-User
functions or this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only.
You agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any
Gracenote Data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to
use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If
your license terminates, you agree to cease
any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers.
Information
Music recognition technology and related
data are provided by Gracenote®.
Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content
delivery.
For more information, visit
www.gracenote.com.
When music is recorded to the HDD from a
CD, information such as the recording artist
and track name are retrieved from the
Gracenote Database and displayed (when
available).
Gracenote may not contain information for
all albums.
Gracenote is an internet-based music
recognition service that allows artist, album,
and track information from CDs to display
on the HDD.
Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates
a year. More information about Gracenote,
its features, and downloads are available at
www.honda.com (in U.S.) or
www.honda.ca (in Canada).
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000 to present
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000 to present Gracenote.
One or more patents owned by Gracenote
apply to this product and service. See the
Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list
of applicable Gracenote patents.
Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the
“Powered by Gracenote” logo are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote in the United States and/or other
countries.
TOC
Index
Home
Continued
583
uuCustomer Service Informationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide.
You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce
its rights under this Agreement against you
directly in its own name.
Information
TOC
Index
Home
584
The Gracenote service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly
assigned numeric identifier is to allow the
Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or
warranties, express or implied, regarding
the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves
the right to delete data from the Gracenote
Servers or to change data categories for any
cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No
warranty is made that the Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers are errorfree or that functioning of Gracenote
Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you
with new enhanced or additional data types
or categories that Gracenote may provide in
the future and is free to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES
NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE
OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© Gracenote 2009
■ Disclaimer of Pandora®
Requirements to access Pandora®
• Latest version of the Pandora app
installed on your Android, Blackberry, or
iPhone.
• Registered Pandora account (you can
create a free account at
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/> or on your
smartphone)
• Connection to the internet via WiFi or
cellular data network.
uuCustomer Service Informationu
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Information
Limitations
• Access to Pandora requires an active
internet connection
• Ability to access Pandora through this
system is subject to change without
notice
• Certain functionality of Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through this system including, but not
limited to, creating new stations, deleting
stations, emailing current stations,
buying songs, viewing additional text
information, logging in to Pandora, and
adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality.
Pandora internet radio is a music service
not affiliated with HONDA. More
information is available at http://
www.pandora.com <http://
www.pandora.com/>. Pandora, the
Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used
with permission.
• Mobile access requires a smartphone
with an active data plan. Standard data
rates may apply.
• Pandora is only available in the United
States.
TOC
Index
Home
585
QRG
INDEX A
Index
Numbers
B
C
D
E
F
G
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 439
Operation ................................................ 440
A
Index
Home
586
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 475
Accessories and Modifications ................. 483
Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 161
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)................. 450
Additives
Coolant ................................................... 507
Engine Oil................................................ 501
Washer.................................................... 512
Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 501
Adjusting
Armrest ................................................... 155
Front Seats .............................................. 148
Head Restraints........................................ 151
Mirrors .................................................... 146
Rear Seats................................................ 154
Steering Wheel ........................................ 145
Temperature........................................ 92, 96
AhaTM Radio ...................................... 230, 283
Air Conditioning System
(Climate Control System)........................ 169
Changing the Mode ................................ 169
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 170
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 537
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 169
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
Sensor..................................................... 172
Synchronized Mode................................. 171
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 169
Air Conditioning System
(Heating and Cooling System) ............... 166
Cooling ................................................... 168
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 168
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 537
Heating ................................................... 167
Air Pressure............................... 526, 571, 573
Airbags........................................................ 39
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 45
After a Collision ........................................ 42
Airbag Care............................................... 51
Event Data Recorder.................................. 24
Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 42
Indicator.............................................. 49, 72
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 50
Sensors ..................................................... 39
Side Airbags .............................................. 46
Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 48
AM/FM Radio............................ 187, 214, 253
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 475
Indicator.................................................... 72
Armrest ..................................................... 155
Audio Remote Controls ........................... 179
Audio System............................................ 174
Adjusting the Sound................ 185, 212, 243
Auxiliary Input Jack.................................. 176
Error Messages........................................ 289
General Information................................ 295
HDD ....................................................... 263
Internet Radio ......................... 196, 228, 281
iPod® ...................................... 193, 224, 273
MP3/WMA/AAC ..................... 198, 231, 284
Reactivating ............................................ 177
Recommended CDs ................................ 296
Recommended Devices ........................... 298
Remote Controls..................................... 179
Security Code ......................................... 177
Theft Protection ...................................... 177
Touch Screen .................................. 204, 237
USB Flash Drives...................................... 298
USB Port ................................................. 175
Authorized Manuals ................................ 581
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 119
Customize .............................. 102, 317, 328
Automatic Lighting.................................. 137
Automatic Transmission .......................... 434
Creeping................................................. 434
Fluid ....................................................... 510
Kickdown ............................................... 434
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 18, 442
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 557
Shifting................................................... 441
Automatic Transmission (CVT)
Creeping................................................. 434
Fluid ....................................................... 509
Kickdown ............................................... 434
Operating the Shift Lever .......... 17, 436, 438
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 557
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
Shifting........................................... 435, 437
Auxiliary Input Jack ................................. 176
Average Fuel Economy ........................ 91, 95
Average Speed ........................................... 96
B
Battery ...................................................... 534
Charging System Indicator ................ 69, 560
Jump Starting ......................................... 554
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 534
Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 535
Belts (Seat).................................................. 32
Beverage Holders..................................... 160
Bluetooth® Audio..................... 201, 234, 287
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............ 339, 376
Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 63
Brake System ............................................ 473
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 475
Brake Assist System................................. 476
Fluid ....................................................... 511
Foot Brake .............................................. 474
Indicator ........................................... 68, 562
Parking Brake.......................................... 473
Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 68
Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 68
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 141
Bulb Replacement.................................... 513
Brake/Taillights and Rear Turn Signal Lights/
Rear Side Marker Lights......................... 520
Fog Lights ............................................... 515
Front Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights........ 518
Headlights ............................................... 513
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 522
Parking Lights .......................................... 519
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 519
Rear License Plate Lights .......................... 522
Side Turn Signal/Emergency
Indicator Lights ...................................... 518
Taillights and Back-Up Lights ................... 521
Bulb Specifications ........................... 570, 572
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 64
Cargo Hooks ............................................. 162
Carrying Cargo.................................. 419, 421
CD Player ................................... 190, 221, 260
Center Pocket ........................................... 159
Certification Label .................................... 574
Changing Bulbs......................................... 513
Charging System Indicator ................. 69, 560
Child Safety................................................. 52
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 118
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 123
Child Seat .................................................... 52
Booster Seats............................................. 63
Child Seat for Infants ................................. 54
Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 55
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt .................................................. 59
Larger Children.......................................... 62
Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 54
Selecting a Child Seat................................ 56
Using a Tether........................................... 61
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 118
Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 540
Cleaning the Interior................................ 538
Climate Control System............................ 169
Changing the Mode ................................ 169
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 170
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 537
Recirculation and Fresh Air Mode ............ 169
Sensors ................................................... 172
Synchronized Mode................................. 171
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 169
Clock.......................................................... 106
Clutch Fluid............................................... 511
Coat Hook................................................. 162
Compact Spare Tire .................. 545, 571, 573
Compass .................................................... 414
Console Compartment ............................. 158
Controls..................................................... 105
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 507
Adding to the Radiator............................ 508
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 507
Overheating ............................................ 558
Creeping
(Automatic Transmission/CVT)............... 434
Cruise Control........................................... 447
Indicator.................................................... 80
Cup Holders .............................................. 160
QRG
Index
Home
587
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Customer Service Information ................. 582
Customized Features .......................... 97, 299
D
Index
Home
588
Daytime Running Lights........................... 139
Dead Battery ............................................. 554
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows .................................. 168, 170
Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 575
Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 136
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 146
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 502
Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 136
Display Button .......................... 181, 207, 239
Door Mirrors ............................................. 147
Doors ......................................................... 108
Auto Door Locking .................................. 119
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 119
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 31, 74
Keys ........................................................ 108
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Inside ...................................... 116
Locking/Unlocking the Doors
from the Outside ................................... 111
Lockout Prevention System ...................... 115
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 528
Driving....................................................... 417
ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) ................ 450
Automatic Transmission (CVT) ................. 434
Braking ................................................... 473
Cruise Control......................................... 447
Shifting Gear................................... 441, 443
Shifting Position .............................. 435, 437
Starting the Engine.......................... 427, 429
Driving Position Memory System ............ 143
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 537
E
Eco Assist System .......................................... 7
ECON Button ............................................ 446
Elapsed Time............................................... 95
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator............................................ 74, 562
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 465
Emergency ................................................ 567
Emergency Trunk Opener........................ 123
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 577
Engine ....................................................... 574
Coolant................................................... 507
Jump Starting.......................................... 554
Oil........................................................... 501
Starting ........................................... 427, 429
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 131
Engine Coolant......................................... 507
Adding to the Radiator............................ 508
Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 507
Overheating ............................................ 558
Temperature Gauge .................................. 89
Engine Oil................................................. 501
Adding ................................................... 504
Checking ................................................ 502
Displaying Oil Life ........................... 489, 493
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 69, 560
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 501
ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 132
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System............................................... 74, 562
Exhaust Gas Hazard
(Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 64
Expanded View Driver’s Mirror ............... 147
Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 540
Exterior Mirrors........................................ 147
F
Features ....................................................
Filters
Dust and Pollen.......................................
Oil ..........................................................
Flat Tire.....................................................
Floor Mats ................................................
Fluids
Automatic Transmission ..........................
Brake/Clutch ...........................................
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) ....................................................
Engine Coolant .......................................
Manual Transmission ..............................
Windshield Washer .................................
173
537
505
545
539
510
511
509
507
509
512
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
Fog Light Indicator .................................... 77
Folding Down the Rear Seat ................... 154
Foot Brake ................................................ 474
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .......... 458
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 42
Front Seats................................................ 148
Adjusting ................................................ 148
Fuel ..................................................... 19, 480
Economy................................................. 482
Gauge ...................................................... 89
Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 91, 96
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Range ................................................. 92, 95
Recommendation.................................... 480
Refueling ................................................ 480
Fuel Economy ........................................... 482
Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 19, 481
Message ................................................. 561
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 19, 481
Fuses ......................................................... 564
Inspecting and Changing ........................ 566
Locations ........................................ 564, 565
G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy................................................. 482
Gauge ...................................................... 89
Information............................................. 480
Instant Fuel Economy .......................... 91, 96
Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 72
Refueling ................................................. 480
Gauges ........................................................ 89
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Automatic Transmission........................... 441
Automatic Transmission (CVT) ......... 435, 437
Manual Transmission ............................... 444
Glass (care) ................................................ 541
Glove Box .................................................. 158
H
Halogen Bulbs................................... 513, 515
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 543
HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ....................... 339, 376
Auto Answer ................................... 355, 391
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook
and Call History ............................. 357, 393
Automatic Transferring .................... 355, 391
Displaying Messages ........................ 371, 410
Editing User Name ................................... 390
HFL Buttons ..................................... 339, 376
HFL Menus ...................................... 342, 378
HFL Status Display ........................... 341, 377
Limitations for Manual Operation .... 341, 377
Making a Call .................................. 361, 402
Options During a Call ...................... 368, 407
Phone Setup .................................... 347, 382
Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 397
Receiving a Call ............................... 367, 406
Receiving a Text Message/E-mail ...... 369, 408
Ring Tone ........................................ 356, 392
Selecting a Mail Account ................. 370, 409
Speed Dial....................................... 358, 394
To Create a Security PIN .................. 354, 389
To Set Up a Text Message/E-mail
Options ......................................... 352, 387
Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio................... 263
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 2
Head Restraints ........................................ 151
Headlights................................................. 136
Aiming .................................................... 513
Automatic Operation............................... 137
Dimming ......................................... 136, 139
Operating................................................ 136
Heaters (Seat) ................................... 164, 165
Heating and Cooling System ................... 166
Cooling ................................................... 168
Defrosting the Windshield
and Windows ........................................ 168
Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 537
Heating ................................................... 167
HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 339, 376
High Beam Indicator .................................. 76
Hill Start Assist System ..................... 428, 432
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 337
QRG
I
Identification Numbers
Engine and Transmission ......................... 574
Vehicle Identification ............................... 574
Ignition Switch ......................................... 131
Index
Home
589
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Index
Home
590
Illumination Control
Knob ....................................................... 141
Immobilizer System .................................. 124
Indicator .................................................... 77
Indicators..................................................... 68
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................... 72
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................. 80
Brake System (Amber)................................ 68
Brake System (Red) .................................... 68
Charging System ............................... 69, 560
CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 80, 448
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 80, 447
Door and Trunk Open................................ 74
ECON Mode ...................................... 80, 446
EPS (Electric Power Steering)
System............................................. 74, 562
Fog Light ................................................... 77
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .............. 78
High Beam................................................. 76
Immobilizer System.................................... 77
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ................. 79
Light Control ............................................. 81
Lights On................................................... 76
Low Fuel.................................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 69, 560
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 75, 469, 471
Maintenance Minder ......................... 80, 489
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 69, 561
Parking Brake and Brake System ........ 68, 562
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 33, 71
Security System Alarm ............................... 77
Smart Entry System ................................... 81
Starter System ........................................... 81
Supplemental Restraint System............ 49, 72
System Message........................................ 76
Transmission ............................................. 71
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 76
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist)
System ............................................ 73, 465
VSA® OFF .......................................... 73, 466
Washer Level............................................. 80
Information .............................................. 569
Information Display ................................... 90
Instant Fuel Economy........................... 91, 96
Instrument Panel ........................................ 67
Brightness Control................................... 141
Interface Dial ............................................ 236
Interior Lights ........................................... 156
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 146
J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 548
Jump Starting ........................................... 554
K
Key Number Tag.......................................
Keyless Lockout Prevention .....................
Keys ...........................................................
Lockout Prevention..................................
Master Keys ............................................
109
115
108
115
108
Number Tag............................................ 109
Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 118
Remote Transmitter ................................ 111
Types and Functions................................ 108
Valet Key ........................................ 109, 122
Won’t Turn ............................................... 22
Kickdown
(Automatic Transmission/CVT) .............. 434
L
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ............. 462
LaneWatchTM .......................................... 467
Language (HFL) ................................ 341, 377
LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 57
Lights ................................................ 136, 513
Automatic............................................... 137
Bulb Replacement ................................... 513
Daytime Running Lights .......................... 139
Fog Lights ............................................... 138
High Beam Indicator ................................. 76
Interior.................................................... 156
Light Switches......................................... 136
Lights On Indicator.................................... 76
Turn Signals ............................................ 136
Load Limits ............................................... 421
Locking/Unlocking ................................... 108
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 119
Childproof Door Locks ............................ 118
From Inside ............................................. 116
From Outside .......................................... 111
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
Keys........................................................ 108
Using a Key............................................. 115
Lockout Prevention System ..................... 115
Low Battery Charge ................................. 560
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 69, 560
Low Smart Entry Remote
Signal Strength....................................... 110
Lower Anchors ........................................... 57
Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 570, 572
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 421
M
Maintenance ............................................ 485
Battery.................................................... 534
Brake/Clutch Fluid................................... 511
Cleaning ................................................. 538
Climate Control System .......................... 537
Coolant .................................................. 507
Heating and Cooling System ................... 537
Maintenance MinderTM............................ 489
Oil .......................................................... 502
Precautions ............................................. 486
Radiator.................................................. 508
Remote Transmitter ................................ 535
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 513
Safety ..................................................... 487
Service Items................................... 491, 495
Tires........................................................ 525
Transmission Fluid................................... 509
Under the Hood ...................................... 497
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 69, 561
Manual Transmission................................ 443
Map Lights ................................................ 157
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 421
Meters, Gauges ........................................... 89
Mirrors....................................................... 146
Adjusting................................................. 146
Door........................................................ 147
Exterior.................................................... 147
Interior Rearview ..................................... 146
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 483
Moonroof.................................................. 130
MP3 ................... 190, 198, 221, 231, 260, 284
Multi-Information Display ......................... 93
Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 478
N
Numbers (Identification) .......................... 574
O
Odometer.............................................. 91, 95
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 501
Adding .................................................... 504
Checking ................................................. 502
Displaying Oil Life ............................ 489, 493
Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 69, 560
Recommended Engine Oil........................ 501
Viscosity .................................................. 501
Opening/Closing
Hood....................................................... 499
Moonroof ............................................... 130
Power Windows ...................................... 127
Trunk ...................................................... 120
Outside Temperature Display.............. 92, 96
Overheating.............................................. 558
QRG
P
Paddle Shifters
(7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)................ 439
Pandora®................................... 197, 229, 282
Panic Mode ............................................... 126
Parking...................................................... 477
Parking Brake ........................................... 473
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator............................................ 68, 562
Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 50
Passing Indicators ..................................... 136
Power Windows ....................................... 127
Precautions While Driving ....................... 433
Rain ........................................................ 433
Pregnant Women ....................................... 37
Puncture (Tire).......................................... 545
R
Radiator .................................................... 508
Radio (AM/FM) ......................... 187, 214, 253
Radio (XM®) ...................................... 218, 257
Index
Home
591
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Radio Data System (RDS).......... 188, 216, 255
Range .................................................... 92, 95
RDS (Radio Data System).......... 188, 216, 255
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 577
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 142
Rear Seat (Folding Down) ........................ 154
Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 165
Rearview Camera...................................... 479
Rearview Mirror........................................ 146
Refueling................................................... 480
Fuel Gauge ................................................ 89
Gasoline .................................. 480, 570, 572
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 72
Regulations ............................... 471, 528, 575
Remote Transmitter.................................. 111
Replacement
Battery..................................................... 535
Bulbs ....................................................... 513
Fuses ............................................... 564, 565
Tires ........................................................ 531
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 523
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 576
Resetting a Trip Meter ......................... 91, 95
S
Index
Home
592
Safe Driving.................................................
Safety Check................................................
Safety Labels ...............................................
Safety Message ...........................................
27
31
65
25
Seat Belts .................................................... 32
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 36
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 34
Checking................................................... 38
Fastening .................................................. 35
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder
Seat Belt.................................................. 59
Pregnant Women ...................................... 37
Reminder .................................................. 33
Warning Indicator ............................... 33, 71
Seat Heaters...................................... 164, 165
Seats .......................................................... 148
Adjusting ................................................ 148
Front Seats .............................................. 148
Rear Seats ............................................... 154
Seat Heaters.................................... 164, 165
Security System......................................... 124
Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 77
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 77
SEL/RESET Button ....................................... 93
Select Lever................. 17, 435, 437, 441, 443
Operation.................. 17, 436, 438, 442, 443
Releasing................................................. 557
Won’t Move............................................ 557
Select/Reset Knob....................................... 90
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 56
Selector Knob (Audio)...................... 180, 203
Setting the Clock ...................................... 106
Shift Lever................... 17, 435, 437, 441, 443
Shift Position Indicator ...... 70, 436, 438, 442
Shifting (Transmission)..... 435, 437, 441, 443
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 36
Side Airbags ............................................... 46
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 48
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System..................................................... 113
Snow Tires ................................................ 533
Spare Tire ................................. 545, 571, 573
Spark Plugs ....................................... 570, 572
Specifications ........................................... 570
Specified Fuel ........................... 480, 570, 572
Speedometer.............................................. 89
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 42
Starting the Engine.......................... 427, 429
Does Not Start ........................................ 551
Engine Switch Buzzer .............................. 131
Jump Starting ......................................... 554
Steering Wheel ........................................ 145
Adjusting ................................................ 145
Stopping ................................................... 477
Summer Tires............................................ 533
Sunglasses Holder .................................... 163
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 42
Switches
(Around the Steering Wheel) ........ 2, 3, 131
SYNC Mode .............................................. 171
System Message Indicator ......................... 76
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
T
Tachometer ................................................ 89
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display .............. 92, 96
Temperature Sensor .................... 92, 96, 172
Time (Setting)........................................... 106
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)..................................................... 469
Indicator ........................................... 75, 563
Tires .......................................................... 525
Air Pressure............................. 526, 571, 573
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 525
Inspection ............................................... 525
Labeling.................................................. 526
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 545
Regulations............................................. 528
Rotation.................................................. 532
Spare Tire ............................... 545, 571, 573
Summer.................................................. 533
Tire Chains.............................................. 533
Wear Indicators....................................... 530
Winter .................................................... 533
Tools ......................................................... 544
Towing a Trailer....................................... 423
Equipment and Accessories..................... 424
Load Limits ............................................. 423
Towing Your Vehicle ............................... 426
Emergency.............................................. 567
TPMS
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ........ 469
Indicator ........................................... 75, 563
Transmission ..................... 435, 437, 441, 443
Automatic ............................................... 441
Automatic (CVT) .............................. 435, 437
Fluid ................................................ 509, 510
Manual.................................................... 443
Number ................................................... 574
Shift Lever Position
Indicator .......................... 70, 436, 438, 442
Trip Meter ............................................. 91, 95
Troubleshooting ....................................... 543
Blown Fuse ...................................... 564, 565
Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 22
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 23
Emergency Towing .................................. 567
Engine Won’t Start .................................. 551
Noise When Braking .................................. 23
Overheating ............................................ 558
Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 545
Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 22, 118
Select Lever Won’t Move ......................... 557
Warning Indicators .................................... 68
Trunk ......................................................... 120
Lid ........................................................... 120
Light Bulb ........................................ 570, 572
Main Switch ............................................ 122
Turn Signals .............................................. 136
Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 76
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 111
Unlocking the Front Doors
from the Inside ......................................... 11
USB Flash Drives ....................................... 298
USB Port .................................................... 175
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button
Start System ............................................ 113
QRG
V
Valet Key........................................... 109, 122
Vanity Mirrors............................................... 5
Vehicle Identification Number ................ 574
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®).................. 465
Off Button............................................... 466
Off Indicator.............................................. 73
System Indicator........................................ 73
Ventilation........................................ 166, 169
Viscosity (Oil) ............................ 501, 571, 573
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist).................. 465
W
Warning and Information Messages... 82, 84
Warning Indicator On/Blinking ............... 560
Warning Labels........................................... 65
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 579
Watts................................................. 570, 572
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 530
Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 548
Window Washers ..................................... 140
Index
Home
593
INDEX
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
2013 Accord Sedan
QRG
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 512
Switch ..................................................... 140
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 127
Windshield ................................................ 140
Cleaning.................................................. 541
Defrosting/Defogging ...................... 168, 170
Washer Fluid............................................ 512
Wiper Blades ........................................... 523
Wipers and Washers ................................ 140
Winter Tires............................................... 533
Snow Tires............................................... 533
Tire Chains .............................................. 533
Wipers and Washers ................................. 140
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 523
WMA ................. 190, 198, 221, 231, 260, 284
Worn Tires................................................. 525
X
XM® Radio......................................... 218, 257
Index
Home
594
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising